<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Rzhou95</id>
	<title>MILL Wiki - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Rzhou95"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Special:Contributions/Rzhou95"/>
	<updated>2026-10-17T04:55:36Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.42.7</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Sputter_Coater&amp;diff=39259</id>
		<title>Sputter Coater</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Sputter_Coater&amp;diff=39259"/>
		<updated>2022-10-26T17:21:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: Rzhou95 moved page Sputter Coater to Plasma Sputtering&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[Plasma Sputtering]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Plasma_Sputtering&amp;diff=39258</id>
		<title>Plasma Sputtering</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Plasma_Sputtering&amp;diff=39258"/>
		<updated>2022-10-26T17:21:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: Rzhou95 moved page Sputter Coater to Plasma Sputtering&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Page-under-construction.png|400px|thumb|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
{|class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; | Cressington 108 Sputter Coater [https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/sop/sputter-coater/ [SOP&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:SputterCoater-052621.png|center|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Available Targets&#039;&#039;&#039;: Gold&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A simple and easy-to-use sputter coater for making samples surface’s more conductive for SEM imagery. A vacuum pump is attached to the sputter coater to achieve vacuum conditions and argon is used as the inert chamber gas. A full calibration has not yet been done on the sputter coater, but the thickness of samples is often changed by varying the time of the sputter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Equipment|char]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=39257</id>
		<title>Main Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=39257"/>
		<updated>2022-10-25T17:06:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: /* Learning and Development (L&amp;amp;D) Teams */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The Materials Innovation and Learning Laboratory (The MILL) is an open access undergraduate student-run make-and-measure space sponsored by the School of Materials Science &amp;amp; Engineering at Georgia Tech. We are based in the Love Manufacturing Building (Rm 176). The MILL provides a safe and relaxed discovery space to gain hands-on experience with common discipline techniques, including the characterization of materials’ chemistry and structure, the measurement of material properties, and materials processing. All Georgia Tech students, faculty, and staff have open access to learn about any of our equipment during our open hours under the supervision of one of our MILL staffers, managed through our equipment teams.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We strive to serve as Georgia Tech’s Hub for experiential education in MSE, providing students with hands-on scientific training and inquiry-based discovery science and engineering design for class projects, team-based capstone design, laboratory courses, independent or group research, and entrepreneurial pursuits. The MILL encourages any and all Georgia Tech students to come visit our space, join our teams, or participate in events hosted by our L&amp;amp;D teams!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== About the MILL Wiki ==&lt;br /&gt;
The MILL Wiki serves as an informational and educational portal about the resources found in the MILL. Like Wikipedia, anyone can contribute to the site—if you would like to learn more about how to contribute, check out our [[MILL Wiki Contributor Guide]] and our [[Sample Page Template]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Navigation ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:Category:Equipment | Equipment and techniques list]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:Category:Software | List of distributable software]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:Category:Theory | Scientific theory articles]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:Category:Materials | Materials at The MILL]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:Category:Research | Areas of MSE research at GT and beyond]] &#039;&#039;(coming soon!)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LoveBuilding1.png|300px|thumb|right|Love Manufacturing Building, home of The MILL]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Teams ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Executive Team ===&lt;br /&gt;
* Meet our [https://mill.mse.gatech.edu/about-us/exec-council/ Exec Council]&lt;br /&gt;
* Meet the [https://mill.mse.gatech.edu/about-us/mill-fellows/ MILL Fellows]&lt;br /&gt;
=== [https://mill.mse.gatech.edu/equipment/about/ Equipment Teams] ===&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://mill.mse.gatech.edu/equipment/characterization-team/ Characterization Team]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://mill.mse.gatech.edu/equipment/measurement-team/ Measurement Team]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://mill.mse.gatech.edu/equipment/processing-team/ Processing Team]&lt;br /&gt;
=== [https://mill.mse.gatech.edu/ld-teams/about/ Learning and Development (L&amp;amp;D) Teams] ===&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://mill.mse.gatech.edu/ld-teams/soa-team/ Science of Art (SOA)]&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://mill.mse.gatech.edu/ld-teams/textiles-team/ Textiles Team]&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/ld-teams/materialbusters/ MaterialBusters]&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/ld-teams/sustainability-committee/ Sustainability Committee]&lt;br /&gt;
*BioExplorers&lt;br /&gt;
*Vapor Deposition Team&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://mill.mse.gatech.edu/ld-teams/retired/ Retired L&amp;amp;D Teams]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:About]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Sample_Page_Template&amp;diff=39256</id>
		<title>Sample Page Template</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Sample_Page_Template&amp;diff=39256"/>
		<updated>2022-10-19T20:25:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;!-- Wikitext comment syntax --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- __NOTOC__  this hides the table of contents, but you may choose whether or not to include it (currently commented out) --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; | Infobox Title&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Phenomxl-sem-setup.png|center|300px]] &amp;lt;!-- THIS IS A COMMENT: insert image .png file here after uploading --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Spec 1&#039;&#039;&#039;: Details&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Spec 2&#039;&#039;&#039;: Details&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
== Overview ==&lt;br /&gt;
This page serves as a template for all other MILL Wiki pages. Please use this as a resource when creating or editing pages. See our [[MILL Wiki Contributor Guide]].&lt;br /&gt;
To use, copy and paste the source (edit source) into your new page—a quick page creation tool (in read mode) is displayed at the bottom of this template for your convenience.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Theory ==&lt;br /&gt;
Theory of operation. Feel free to add hyperlinks to other internal pages about the topic (ex. 3D Printing &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\rightarrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; Additive Manufacturing) or external links as such: [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Help:Editing_pages Editing pages on Mediawiki].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LoveBuilding1.png|thumb|300px|&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Image example:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; This is the default image format for the MILL Wiki.]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Subsection 1 ===&lt;br /&gt;
Formulae or sidenotes about theory can be placed in subsections. (ex. XRD &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\rightarrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; Bragg&#039;s Law)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Subsection 2 ===&lt;br /&gt;
* A LaTeX extension is available on the MILL Wiki.&lt;br /&gt;
** Simply enclose your LaTeX in &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;...&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Subsubsection ====&lt;br /&gt;
# To display a monospaced code textbox, use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;...&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## To remove Wiki formatting, use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;...&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Relevant Pages ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Scanning Electron Microscope (SEM)]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Help:Cite Creating references for your page]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Help:Wikitext Complete Wikitext syntax document]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Cheatsheet Shortened formatting cheatsheet]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- quickly create a page --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Create a new page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;If the page already exists, this will redirect you to the source editor.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;inputbox&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
type=create&lt;br /&gt;
break=no&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/inputbox&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:About]] &amp;lt;!-- CHANGE THIS TO THE PROPER CATEGORY--&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Sample_Page_Template&amp;diff=39255</id>
		<title>Sample Page Template</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Sample_Page_Template&amp;diff=39255"/>
		<updated>2022-10-19T20:24:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;!-- Wikitext comment syntax --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- __NOTOC__  this hides the table of contents, but you may choose whether or not to include it (currently commented out) --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; | Infobox Title&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Phenomxl-sem-setup.png|center|300px]] &amp;lt;!-- THIS IS A COMMENT: insert image .png file here after uploading --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Spec 1&#039;&#039;&#039;: Details&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Spec 2&#039;&#039;&#039;: Details&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
== Overview ==&lt;br /&gt;
This page serves as a template for all other MILL Wiki pages. Please use this as a resource when creating or editing pages. See our [[MILL Wiki Contributor Guide]].&lt;br /&gt;
To use, copy and paste the source (edit source) into your new page—a quick page creation tool (in read mode) is displayed at the bottom of this template for your convenience.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Theory ==&lt;br /&gt;
Theory of operation. Feel free to add hyperlinks to other internal pages about the topic (ex. 3D Printing &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\rightarrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; Additive Manufacturing) or external links as such: [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Help:Editing_pages Editing pages on Mediawiki].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LoveBuilding1.png|thumb|300px|&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Image example:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; This is the default image format for the MILL Wiki.]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Subsection 1 ===&lt;br /&gt;
Formulae or sidenotes about theory can be placed in subsections. (ex. XRD &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\rightarrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; Bragg&#039;s Law)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Subsection 2 ===&lt;br /&gt;
* A LaTeX extension is available on the MILL Wiki.&lt;br /&gt;
** Simply enclose your LaTeX in &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;...&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Subsubsection ====&lt;br /&gt;
# To display a monospaced code textbox, use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;...&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## To remove Wiki formatting, use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;...&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Relevant Pages ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Scanning Electron Microscope (SEM)]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Extras ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Help:Cite Creating references for your page]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Help:Wikitext Complete Wikitext syntax document]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Cheatsheet Shortened formatting cheatsheet]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- quickly create a page --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Create a new page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;If the page already exists, this will redirect you to the source editor.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;inputbox&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
type=create&lt;br /&gt;
break=no&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/inputbox&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:About]] &amp;lt;!-- CHANGE THIS TO THE PROPER CATEGORY--&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=39239</id>
		<title>Main Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=39239"/>
		<updated>2022-04-07T06:23:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The Materials Innovation and Learning Laboratory (The MILL) is an open access undergraduate student-run make-and-measure space sponsored by the School of Materials Science &amp;amp; Engineering at Georgia Tech. We are based in the Love Manufacturing Building (Rm 176). The MILL provides a safe and relaxed discovery space to gain hands-on experience with common discipline techniques, including the characterization of materials’ chemistry and structure, the measurement of material properties, and materials processing. All Georgia Tech students, faculty, and staff have open access to learn about any of our equipment during our open hours under the supervision of one of our MILL staffers, managed through our equipment teams.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We strive to serve as Georgia Tech’s Hub for experiential education in MSE, providing students with hands-on scientific training and inquiry-based discovery science and engineering design for class projects, team-based capstone design, laboratory courses, independent or group research, and entrepreneurial pursuits. The MILL encourages any and all Georgia Tech students to come visit our space, join our teams, or participate in events hosted by our L&amp;amp;D teams!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== About the MILL Wiki ==&lt;br /&gt;
The MILL Wiki serves as an informational and educational portal about the resources found in the MILL. Like Wikipedia, anyone can contribute to the site—if you would like to learn more about how to contribute, check out our [[MILL Wiki Contributor Guide]] and our [[Sample Page Template]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Navigation ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:Category:Equipment | Equipment and techniques list]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:Category:Software | List of distributable software]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:Category:Theory | Scientific theory articles]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:Category:Materials | Materials at The MILL]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:Category:Research | Areas of MSE research at GT and beyond]] &#039;&#039;(coming soon!)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LoveBuilding1.png|300px|thumb|right|Love Manufacturing Building, home of The MILL]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Teams ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Executive Team ===&lt;br /&gt;
* Meet our [https://mill.mse.gatech.edu/about-us/exec-council/ Exec Council]&lt;br /&gt;
* Meet the [https://mill.mse.gatech.edu/about-us/mill-fellows/ MILL Fellows]&lt;br /&gt;
=== [https://mill.mse.gatech.edu/equipment/about/ Equipment Teams] ===&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://mill.mse.gatech.edu/equipment/characterization-team/ Characterization Team]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://mill.mse.gatech.edu/equipment/measurement-team/ Measurement Team]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://mill.mse.gatech.edu/equipment/processing-team/ Processing Team]&lt;br /&gt;
=== [https://mill.mse.gatech.edu/ld-teams/about/ Learning and Development (L&amp;amp;D) Teams] ===&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://mill.mse.gatech.edu/ld-teams/soa-team/ Science of Art (SOA)]&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://mill.mse.gatech.edu/ld-teams/textiles-team/ Textiles Team]&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/ld-teams/materialbusters/ MaterialBusters]&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/ld-teams/sustainability-committee/ Sustainability Committee]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://mill.mse.gatech.edu/ld-teams/retired/ Retired L&amp;amp;D Teams]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:About]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Filament_Recycling&amp;diff=39238</id>
		<title>Filament Recycling</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Filament_Recycling&amp;diff=39238"/>
		<updated>2022-03-12T21:33:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: /* Extruders [https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/sop/filament-extruder/ [SOP]] */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{|class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; | Shini SG-16N Granulator [https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/sop/granulator/ [SOP&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Granulator-062721.png|center|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Rotor &amp;amp; Knife Type:&#039;&#039;&#039; Solid/Staggered Cut&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Screen size:&#039;&#039;&#039; 5mm&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Cutting Chamber:&#039;&#039;&#039; 6.3&amp;quot;x8.3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Bed Knives:&#039;&#039;&#039; 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Rotating Blades:&#039;&#039;&#039; 9&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Thru-put:&#039;&#039;&#039; 76 lbs/hr&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Plastic Granulators and Filament Extruders allow polymers to be recycled for future use in FDM 3D printers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Granulators==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Granulator1.PNG|thumb|left|400px|A diagram of the internal mechanism of a typical plastic granulator &amp;lt;ref Name=&amp;quot;Granulator&amp;quot;&amp;gt; Zealand, W. S. N. (n.d.). Plastics granulator. WorkSafe. https://www.worksafe.govt.nz/topic-and-industry/machinery/working-safely-with-plastic-production-machinery/plastics-granulator/. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a plastic granulator, robust cutting knives are mounted in a specific pattern on a open rotor that is spun at high speeds. Stationary knives are mounted within a cutting chamber at precise locations where they are allowed to come in contact with the rotary knives. As the knives come into contact, plastic scrap within the cutting chamber are cut in a scissor-like motion. Granules pass through a screen which limits their maximum size. Granules that fall through the screen are collected for further processing. Granulators reduce materials to much smaller sizes compared to shredders and even grinders, with sizes of 0.2 mm or lower being possible. &amp;lt;ref Name=&amp;quot;Shini&amp;quot;&amp;gt; Calovini, L. (2021, April 20). Shredding vs. Granulating: What&#039;s the Difference? Shini USA. https://www.shiniusa.com/2019/02/27/shredding-vs-granulating/. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; These small sizes are made possible due to the open-rotor design of granulators that helps to facilitate the processing of lighter materials, compared to the closed-rotor operation of shredders and grinders The open-rotor functionality of granulators also means more air space is present facilitating product agitation and cooling. Granulators tend to require a more specialized feeding process, either by hand, conveyer, or robot, to avoid jamming, in comparison to shredders which do not necessitate as much oversight and can simply be fed material that has been dumped in the feed hopper. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Extruders [https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/sop/filament-maker/ [SOP&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;]==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Extruder.PNG|thumb|A diagram of a typical filament extruder &amp;lt;ref Name=&amp;quot;3devo&amp;quot;&amp;gt; 3devo. (2021, May 17). Why Should You Learn About Filament Extrusion? 3devo. https://3devo.com/blog/benefits-of-learning-extrusion/. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; |left|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Raw thermoplastic compound material in the form of granules is gravity fed from a top mounted hopper into the barrel of the extruder. &amp;lt;ref Name=&amp;quot;Noztek&amp;quot;&amp;gt; Admin. (2013, October 7). How does a filament extruder work? - Noztek Extrusion Systems. Noztek Extrusion Systems. https://www.noztek.com/filament-extruder-work/.  &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Additives such as colorants and UV inhibitors are often used and can be mixed into the resin prior to arriving at the hopper. The material enters through the feed throat (an opening near the rear of the barrel) and comes into contact with the screw. The rotating screw forces the plastic beads forward into the barrel which is heated to the desired melt temperature of the molten plastic. It is then extruded as filament through a die and wound onto a spool for later use in a 3D printer..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Equipment|proc]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=File:MILL_RGB_banner_tall.png&amp;diff=39237</id>
		<title>File:MILL RGB banner tall.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=File:MILL_RGB_banner_tall.png&amp;diff=39237"/>
		<updated>2022-02-01T04:29:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Uniaxial_Press&amp;diff=39236</id>
		<title>Uniaxial Press</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Uniaxial_Press&amp;diff=39236"/>
		<updated>2021-10-06T03:16:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; | Carver 3851 Uniaxial Press [https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/sop/uniaxial-press/ [SOP&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:UniaxialPress-062721.png|center|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Page-under-construction.png|400px|thumb|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the MILL’s uni-axial press to sinter a ceramic or cut a piece of material using a die.  The plates of the press can be heated to a user-specified temperature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Equipment|proc]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Ball_Mill&amp;diff=39235</id>
		<title>Ball Mill</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Ball_Mill&amp;diff=39235"/>
		<updated>2021-10-06T03:16:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Page-under-construction.png|400px|thumb|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
{|class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; | US Stoneware 784AVM Jar Mill [https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/sop/rolling-bm/ [SOP&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:RollingBM-062721.png|center|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{|class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; | Across International PQ-N04 Planetary Ball Mill [https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/sop/planetary-bm/ [SOP&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:PlanetaryBM-062721.png|center|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Use the MILL’s rolling ball mill for comminution. This has a variety of applications in powder processing where smaller powder sizes may be preferable for solid state diffusion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Equipment|proc]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Liquid_Nitrogen_Generator&amp;diff=39234</id>
		<title>Liquid Nitrogen Generator</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Liquid_Nitrogen_Generator&amp;diff=39234"/>
		<updated>2021-10-06T03:15:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{|class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; | elan2 Liquid Nitrogen Generator [https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/sop/ln2-generator/ [SOP&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:LN2Generator-062721.png|center|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Page-under-construction.png|400px|thumb|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Equipment|proc]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Screen_Printer&amp;diff=39233</id>
		<title>Screen Printer</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Screen_Printer&amp;diff=39233"/>
		<updated>2021-10-06T03:15:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{|class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; | Screen Printer [https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/sop/screen-printer/ [SOP&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Page-under-construction.png|center|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Projected availability&#039;&#039;&#039;: Fall 2021&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Page-under-construction.png|400px|thumb|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Equipment|proc]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Category:Equipment&amp;diff=39232</id>
		<title>Category:Equipment</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Category:Equipment&amp;diff=39232"/>
		<updated>2021-10-06T03:14:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: /* Science of Art */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;See our [https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/equipment/list/ equipment status list and SOPs].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Learn more about our [https://mill.mse.gatech.edu/equipment/about/ Equipment Teams].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Characterization==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Scanning Electron Microscope (SEM)]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Sputter Coater]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Optical Microscopy]]&lt;br /&gt;
**Digital Microscope&lt;br /&gt;
**Stereomicroscope&lt;br /&gt;
**Inverted Microscope&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Optical Profilometer]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Fourier-Transform Infrared Spectrometer (FTIR)]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[X-ray Diffractometer (XRD)]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[X-ray Fluorescence Spectrometer (XRF)]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Measurement==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Mechanical Tester]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Microhardness Tester]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Differential Scanning Calorimeter (DSC)]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Thermogravimetric Analyzer (TGA)]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Moisture Analyzer]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Infrared Camera]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[UV-Vis Spectrophotometer]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Contact Angle Goniometer]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Analytical Balance]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Processing==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 3D Printing ===&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Fused Filament Fabrication (FFF)|Fused Filament Fabrication (FFF)]]/Fused Deposition Modeling (FDM) Printers&lt;br /&gt;
** Ultimaker 2+&lt;br /&gt;
** Hyrel System 30M&lt;br /&gt;
** Prusa i3 MK3S&lt;br /&gt;
** Dimension SST 1200es&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Stereolithography (SLA)]] Printers&lt;br /&gt;
** Resin Printer&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Filament Recycling]]&lt;br /&gt;
** Granulator&lt;br /&gt;
** Filament Extruder&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Science of Art ===&lt;br /&gt;
* Hot Plates&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Furnaces &amp;amp; Kilns]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/sop/vinyl-cutter/ Vinyl Cutter]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Textiles ===&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Sewing Machine]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Embroidery Machine]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Screen Printer]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Heat Press]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Other ===&lt;br /&gt;
* Vacuum Former&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Liquid Nitrogen Generator]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Ceramics Lab (Love 369) ===&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Uniaxial Press]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Ball Mill]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Vibratory Tumbler&lt;br /&gt;
* Sieve Shaker&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Furnaces &amp;amp; Kilns|Electric Furnaces]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Embroidery_Machine&amp;diff=39231</id>
		<title>Embroidery Machine</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Embroidery_Machine&amp;diff=39231"/>
		<updated>2021-10-06T03:14:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{|class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; | Brother Embroidery Machine [https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/sop/embroidery-machine/ [SOP&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Embroidery-052621.png|center|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Page-under-construction.png|400px|thumb|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Equipment|proc]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Sewing_Machine&amp;diff=39230</id>
		<title>Sewing Machine</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Sewing_Machine&amp;diff=39230"/>
		<updated>2021-10-06T03:13:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{|class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; | Brother Sewing Machine [https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/sop/sewing-machine/ [SOP&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Sewing-052621.png|center|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Page-under-construction.png|400px|thumb|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Equipment|proc]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Furnaces_%26_Kilns&amp;diff=39229</id>
		<title>Furnaces &amp; Kilns</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Furnaces_%26_Kilns&amp;diff=39229"/>
		<updated>2021-10-06T03:13:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{|class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; | Paragon Fusion CS14D Glass Kiln [https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/sop/glass-kiln/ [SOP&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:GlassKiln-062721.png|center|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furnace SOP: [https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/sop/melting-furnace/ [SOP&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Page-under-construction.png|400px|thumb|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Equipment|proc]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Filament_Recycling&amp;diff=39228</id>
		<title>Filament Recycling</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Filament_Recycling&amp;diff=39228"/>
		<updated>2021-10-06T03:12:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{|class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; | Shini SG-16N Granulator [https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/sop/granulator/ [SOP&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Granulator-062721.png|center|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Rotor &amp;amp; Knife Type:&#039;&#039;&#039; Solid/Staggered Cut&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Screen size:&#039;&#039;&#039; 5mm&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Cutting Chamber:&#039;&#039;&#039; 6.3&amp;quot;x8.3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Bed Knives:&#039;&#039;&#039; 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Rotating Blades:&#039;&#039;&#039; 9&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Thru-put:&#039;&#039;&#039; 76 lbs/hr&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Plastic Granulators and Filament Extruders allow polymers to be recycled for future use in FDM 3D printers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Granulators==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Granulator1.PNG|thumb|left|400px|A diagram of the internal mechanism of a typical plastic granulator &amp;lt;ref Name=&amp;quot;Granulator&amp;quot;&amp;gt; Zealand, W. S. N. (n.d.). Plastics granulator. WorkSafe. https://www.worksafe.govt.nz/topic-and-industry/machinery/working-safely-with-plastic-production-machinery/plastics-granulator/. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a plastic granulator, robust cutting knives are mounted in a specific pattern on a open rotor that is spun at high speeds. Stationary knives are mounted within a cutting chamber at precise locations where they are allowed to come in contact with the rotary knives. As the knives come into contact, plastic scrap within the cutting chamber are cut in a scissor-like motion. Granules pass through a screen which limits their maximum size. Granules that fall through the screen are collected for further processing. Granulators reduce materials to much smaller sizes compared to shredders and even grinders, with sizes of 0.2 mm or lower being possible. &amp;lt;ref Name=&amp;quot;Shini&amp;quot;&amp;gt; Calovini, L. (2021, April 20). Shredding vs. Granulating: What&#039;s the Difference? Shini USA. https://www.shiniusa.com/2019/02/27/shredding-vs-granulating/. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; These small sizes are made possible due to the open-rotor design of granulators that helps to facilitate the processing of lighter materials, compared to the closed-rotor operation of shredders and grinders The open-rotor functionality of granulators also means more air space is present facilitating product agitation and cooling. Granulators tend to require a more specialized feeding process, either by hand, conveyer, or robot, to avoid jamming, in comparison to shredders which do not necessitate as much oversight and can simply be fed material that has been dumped in the feed hopper. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Extruders [https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/sop/filament-extruder/ [SOP&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;]==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Extruder.PNG|thumb|A diagram of a typical filament extruder &amp;lt;ref Name=&amp;quot;3devo&amp;quot;&amp;gt; 3devo. (2021, May 17). Why Should You Learn About Filament Extrusion? 3devo. https://3devo.com/blog/benefits-of-learning-extrusion/. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; |left|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Raw thermoplastic compound material in the form of granules is gravity fed from a top mounted hopper into the barrel of the extruder. &amp;lt;ref Name=&amp;quot;Noztek&amp;quot;&amp;gt; Admin. (2013, October 7). How does a filament extruder work? - Noztek Extrusion Systems. Noztek Extrusion Systems. https://www.noztek.com/filament-extruder-work/.  &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Additives such as colorants and UV inhibitors are often used and can be mixed into the resin prior to arriving at the hopper. The material enters through the feed throat (an opening near the rear of the barrel) and comes into contact with the screw. The rotating screw forces the plastic beads forward into the barrel which is heated to the desired melt temperature of the molten plastic. It is then extruded as filament through a die and wound onto a spool for later use in a 3D printer..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Equipment|proc]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Stereolithography_(SLA)&amp;diff=39227</id>
		<title>Stereolithography (SLA)</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Stereolithography_(SLA)&amp;diff=39227"/>
		<updated>2021-10-06T03:11:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{|class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; | Prusa SL1 Resin Printer and CW1 Curing &amp;amp; Waching Machine [https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/sop/resin-printer/ [SOP&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:ResinPrinter-052621.png|center|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Resin Types&#039;&#039;&#039;: Prusa Tough (Orange, Black)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SLADiagram.PNG|thumb|left|Diagram of the key parts of a typical desktop SLA printer]]&lt;br /&gt;
Stereolithography (SLA) belongs to a family of additive manufacturing technologies known as vat photopolymerization, commonly known as resin 3D printing&amp;lt;ref Name=&amp;quot;Formlabs&amp;quot;&amp;gt; Formlabs. (n.d.). The Ultimate Guide to Stereolithography (SLA) 3D Printing. https://formlabs.com/blog/ultimate-guide-to-stereolithography-sla-3d-printing/.  &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;. These machines are all built around the same principle, using a light source—a laser or projector—to cure liquid resin into hardened plastic. The main physical differentiation lies in the arrangement of the core components, such as the light source, the build platform, and the resin tank. SLA 3D printers use light-reactive thermoset materials called “resin.” When SLA resins are exposed to certain wavelengths of light, short molecular chains join together, polymerizing monomers and oligomers into solidified rigid or flexible geometries. SLA parts have the highest resolution and accuracy, the sharpest details, and the smoothest surface finishes of all 3D printing technologies, but the main benefit of the stereolithography lies in its versatility. Material manufacturers have created innovative SLA resin formulations with a wide range of optical, mechanical, and thermal properties to match those of standard, engineering, and industrial thermoplastics.&lt;br /&gt;
== Principle ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SLAPrinciple.PNG|thumb|left|500px|Diagram showing how SLA printing builds layers]]&lt;br /&gt;
When the process starts, an ultraviolet laser “draws” the first layer of the print into the photosensitive resin&amp;lt;ref Name=&amp;quot;All3DP&amp;quot;&amp;gt; All3DP. (2020, September 16). Stereolithography / SLA 3D Printing – Simply Explained. https://all3dp.com/2/stereolithography-3d-printing-simply-explained/. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;. Wherever the laser hits, the liquid solidifies. The laser is directed to the appropriate coordinates by a computer-controlled mirror. Most desktop SLA printers work upside-down. That is, the laser is pointed up to the build platform, which starts low and is incrementally raised. After the first layer, the platform is raised according to the layer thickness (typically about 0.1 mm) and the additional resin is allowed to flow below the already-printed portion. The laser then solidifies the next cross-section, and the process is repeated until the whole part is complete. The resin that is not touched by the laser remains in the vat and can be reused. After finishing the material polymerization, the platform rises out of the tank and the excess resin is drained. At the end of the process, the model is removed from the platform, washed of excess resin, and then placed in a UV oven for final curing. Post-print curing enables objects to reach the highest possible strength and become more stable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Why Choose SLA 3D Printing? ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SLAvSFDM.PNG|thumb|While FDM 3D printed parts tend to have visible layer lines and might show inaccuracies around complex features, parts printed on SLA machines have sharp edges, a smooth surface finish, and minimal visible layer lines.]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Isotropy ===&lt;br /&gt;
Because 3D printing creates parts one layer at a time, completed prints may have variations in strength based on orientation of the part relative to the printing process, with different properties in X, Y, and Z axes. Extrusion-based 3D printing processes like fused deposition modeling (FDM) are known for being anisotropic due to layer-to-layer differences created by the print process. This anisotropy limits the usefulness of FDM for certain applications, or requires more adjustments on the part geometry side to compensate for it. In contrast, SLA resin 3D printers create highly isotropic parts. Achieving part isotropy is based on a number of factors that can be tightly controlled by integrating material chemistry with the print process. During printing, resin components form covalent bonds, but layer to layer, the part remains in a semi-reacted “green state.” While in the green state, the resin retains polymerizable groups that can form bonds across layers, imparting isotropy and watertightness to the part upon final cure. On the molecular level, there is no difference between X, Y, or Z planes. This results in parts with predictable mechanical performance critical for applications like jigs and fixtures, end-use parts, and functional prototyping.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Watertightness ===&lt;br /&gt;
SLA printed objects are continuous, whether producing geometries with solid features or internal channels. This watertightness is important for engineering and manufacturing applications where air or fluid flow must be controlled and predictable. Engineers and designers use the watertightness of SLA printers to solve air and fluid flow challenges for automotive uses, biomedical research, and to validate part designs for consumer products like kitchen appliances.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Accuracy and Precision ===&lt;br /&gt;
Industries from dental to manufacturing depend on SLA 3D printing to repeatedly create accurate, precise components. For a print process to produce accurate and precise parts, multiple factors must be tightly controlled. The combination of the heated resin tank and the closed build environment provides almost identical conditions for each print. Better accuracy is also a function of lower printing temperature compared to thermoplastic-based technologies that melt the raw material. Because stereolithography uses light instead of heat, the printing process takes place at close to room temperature, and printed parts don&#039;t suffer from thermal expansion and contraction artifacts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fine Features and Smooth Surface Finish ===&lt;br /&gt;
SLA printers are considered the gold standard for smooth surface finish, with appearances comparable to traditional manufacturing methods like machining, injection molding, and extrusion. This surface quality is ideal for applications that require a flawless finish and also helps reduce post-processing time, since parts can easily be sanded, polished, and painted. In comparison, FDM and SLS printers typically print Z-axis layers at 100 to 300 microns. However, a part printed at 100 microns on an FDM or SLS printer looks different from a part printed at 100 microns on an SLA printer. SLA prints have a smoother surface finish right out of the printer, because the outermost perimeter walls are straight, and the newly printed layer interacts with the previous layer, smoothing out the staircase effect. FDM prints tend to have clearly visible layers, whereas SLS has a grainy surface from the sintered powder. The smallest possible detail is also much finer on SLA, given 85 micron laser spot size on a high end desktop model, in comparison with 350 microns on industrial SLS printers, and 250–800 micron nozzles on FDM machines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Material Versatility ===&lt;br /&gt;
SLA resins have the benefit of a wide range of formulation configurations: materials can be soft or hard, heavily filled with secondary materials like glass and ceramic, or imbued with mechanical properties like high heat deflection temperature or impact resistance. Material range from industry-specific, like dentures, to those that closely match final materials for prototyping, formulated to withstand extensive testing and perform under stress. In some cases, its this combination of versatility and functionality that leads to companies to initially bring resin 3D printing in-house. After finding one application solved by a specific functional material, it’s usually not long before more possibilities are uncovered, and the printer becomes a tool for leveraging the diverse capabilities of various materials.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Equipment|proc]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References == &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Fused_Filament_Fabrication_(FFF)&amp;diff=39226</id>
		<title>Fused Filament Fabrication (FFF)</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Fused_Filament_Fabrication_(FFF)&amp;diff=39226"/>
		<updated>2021-10-06T03:10:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{| class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!|&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; |Ultimaker 2+ (FFF) [https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/sop/ultimaker/ [SOP&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; |Hyrel System 30M (FFF) [https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/sop/hyrel/ [SOP&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; |Prusa i3 MK3S (FFF) [https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/sop/prusa-i3/ [SOP&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;||[[File:Ultimaker-052621.png|center|270px]]||[[File:Hyrel-052621.png|center|270px]]||[[File:PrusaPrinter-052621.png|center|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Slicer Software&#039;&#039;&#039;:||Ultimaker Cura||Slic3r (built-in)||PrusaSlicer&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Build Volume&#039;&#039;&#039;:||22.3(L) x 22.3(W) x 20.5(H) cm||22.5(L) x 20(W) x 20(H) cm||25(L) x 21(W) x 21(H) cm&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Extruders&#039;&#039;&#039;:||BondTech Dual Drive||?||BondTech gears with E3D V6 hotend (max. 285°C)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Supported Filament&#039;&#039;&#039;:||PLA, ABS, CPE, CPE+, TPU, PC, PP||PLA, ABS, PEEK ||PLA, PETG, ASA, ABS, PC, CPE, PVA/BVOH, PVB, HIPS, PP, Flex, nGen, Nylon, Carbon filled, Woodfill&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Filament Diameter&#039;&#039;&#039;:||2.85mm||1.75mm||1.75mm&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Layer Resolution&#039;&#039;&#039;:||0.06-0.15 mm||?||0.05 - 0.35 mm&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Extrusion Speed&#039;&#039;&#039;:||up to 8 mm&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;/s||?||?&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;XY Precision&#039;&#039;&#039;:||12.5 µ&#039;&#039;m&#039;&#039;||5 µ&#039;&#039;m&#039;&#039;||?&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Z Precision&#039;&#039;&#039;:||5 µ&#039;&#039;m&#039;&#039;||1 µ&#039;&#039;m&#039;&#039;||?&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
==Introduction==&lt;br /&gt;
Fused Filament Fabrication (FFF) is a technology that enables the creation of prototypes in short timeframes by moving an extrusion nozzle horizontally and vertically&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;FDM 3D printing - Fused Deposition Modeling also know as FFF&#039;&#039;. Tractus3D. (2020, July 16). &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;https://tractus3d.com/knowledge/learn-3d-printing/fdm-3d-printing/&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;. It is also known as fused deposition modeling (FDM) which is trademarked by Stratasys. These machines are all built with a heated nozzle that extrudes thermoplastic filaments onto a build plate where the cross-sectional layers are applied individually to create the 3D object. The differences in the printers are the types of nozzles, the maximum heat of the nozzles and the bed, the size of the build plate, the size of filament allowed, and whether the printer is enclosed or not. These differences will impact the kind of material that can be printed and the size of the object as well as the detailing of the object. FFF 3D printers use thermoplastic filaments to build up layers of 3D objects by cooling the plastic so that it forms bonds with the previous layer. FFF printing has a larger variety of materials and colors and blends and requires little to no cleaning with lower material and machining costs.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:FDM_printing_diagram.png|thumb|right|300px|1 - nozzle,                                                                2 - filament layers,                                                        3 - build plate&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;© User:Gringer / Wikimedia Commons / CC0 1.0]]&lt;br /&gt;
==Principle==&lt;br /&gt;
The process for FFF printing starts with a digital design being uploaded to the computer on the printer. The computer then translates the object from the design into coordinates for the base and nozzle to follow. The nozzle is heated which melts the filaments then the nozzle extrudes the melted plastic onto the base plate layer by layer. As the nozzle moves, the plastic solidifies to form the object in 3 dimensions. The larger and the more complicated the object, the longer the process takes. The detail on finished prints is limited by the sizing of the nozzle, but it does not produce the finest of details. FFF printers work with the nozzle above the bed plate. Some printers have the nozzle move in both x and y directions (Ultimaker); some nozzles move in x and z directions (Prusa), and some move in the y direction only (Hyrel). Whichever direction the nozzle does not move, the bed moves. The filament needs to bond to a previous layer in order for the layers to be properly formed. This means that if the angle is greater than 45 degrees, support material is needed to build the layers. This computer knows to generate the supports for the object, and support material is removable after the print is finished. At the end of the process, the object can be removed from the build plate then the supports should be removed and the print is done.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:FDM_driver.png|thumb|right|300px|1 - filament, 2 - extruder, 3 - nozzle, 4 - print, 5 - build plate&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;© User:Jona / Wikimedia Commons / CC-BY-SA-4.0]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why Choose FDM/FFF 3D Printing?==&lt;br /&gt;
===Material Variety===&lt;br /&gt;
FFF printing has a wide variety of materials available. There are composite blends and flexible materials along with many more options. Some materials include PLA, ABS, PETG, PEI, PEEK, TPU, HIPS, nGEN, Nylon, POM, Carbon Fiber PLA, and wood composites. These materials can also be used simultaneously which offers a wide range of flexibility in the process. There have also been an abundance of colors created which increases the variety in prints&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;FDM vs. SLA: Compare the Two Most Popular Types of 3D Printers&#039;&#039;. Formlabs. (n.d.). &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;https://formlabs.com/blog/fdm-vs-sla-compare-types-of-3d-printers/&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Prototyping===&lt;br /&gt;
FFF printed prototypes are generally ideal because they can undergo heat, chemical stress, and mechanical stress with little to no problems. The printing process also produces detailed prototypes that can be used to ensure fit and form for the real parts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Low Machine and Equipment Costs===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
FFF printing is cheaper than other 3D printing methods. The materials used are less costly than other printers along with the printers being more cost efficient. The basic printers can cost a few hundred dollars while the better printers can cost anywhere from $2,000-$8,000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===No cleaning===&lt;br /&gt;
FFF processing creates a product that is ready for use immediately after print, unless there are supports which need to be removed before use. This makes the method efficient and less messy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!|&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; |Stratasys Dimension sst 1200es (FDM) [https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/sop/dimension/ [SOP&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;||[[File:Dimension-062721.png|center|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Build Volume&#039;&#039;&#039;:||10&amp;quot; x 10&amp;quot; x 12&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Filament Types&#039;&#039;&#039;:||ABS with PLA supports&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==References==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Equipment|proc]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Analytical_Balance&amp;diff=39225</id>
		<title>Analytical Balance</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Analytical_Balance&amp;diff=39225"/>
		<updated>2021-10-06T03:09:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{|class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; | VWR Analytical Balance [https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/sop/analytical-balance/ [SOP&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:VWRBalance-052621.png|center|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Mass Range&#039;&#039;&#039;: 10mg - 160g&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Precision&#039;&#039;&#039;: 0.1mg (0.0001g)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
The VWR Balances provide maximum weighing performance and are used for the accurate weighing of samples and precipitates. They are designed to measure small masses in the sub-milligram range. They are useful for determining density via the Archimedes method and can be used to take measurements over time.  For example, they can be used to measure the rate at which a liquid evaporates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Archimedes Method ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Archimedes method is used to determine the density of samples without needing to measure the sample’s physical dimensions. The difference in mass between the dry and submerged samples is equal to the volume of water displaced by the submerged sample because water has a density of ~1 gm/cm³. The density of the sample is found by taking the dry mass and dividing it by this volume. This method should only be used with samples that will not dissolve in water, as it will not work properly with water-soluble samples. The formula used is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \rho = \frac{m_d}{V} = \frac{m_d}{m_d-m_w} &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \rho  &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is density (&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; g/cm^3 &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;),  &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; V  &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is volume, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; m_d &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is the dry mass, and &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; m_w &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is the submerged (&amp;quot;wet&amp;quot;) mass.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a solvent other than water is used, or you need to take very precise density measurements based on liquid temperature, the formula becomes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \rho = \frac{m_d}{V} \frac{m_d}{m_d-m_w}*\rho_s &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \rho_s  &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is the density of the solvent. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Equipment|meas]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Contact_Angle_Goniometry&amp;diff=39224</id>
		<title>Contact Angle Goniometry</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Contact_Angle_Goniometry&amp;diff=39224"/>
		<updated>2021-10-06T03:08:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{|class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; | ramé-hart 210-U4 Contact Angle Goniometer [https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/sop/contact-angle/ [SOP&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:WCA-052621.png|center|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Sample Type&#039;&#039;&#039;: Liquids and Solutions&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Contact Angle Goniometer, or Water Contact Angle (WCA) Tensiometer, measures the static contact angle of a drop of various liquids and solutions and surface tension.&lt;br /&gt;
==Introduction and Applications ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Hydrophobicphilic.PNG|thumb|left|A drop of water on hydrophilic (left) and hydrophobic (right) surfaces &amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;WhitePaper&amp;quot;&amp;gt; Susanna, L (n.d.). &#039;&#039;Contact angle – What is it and how do you measure it?&#039;&#039; [White Paper] &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;]]Contact angle, θ (theta), is a quantitative measure of wetting of a solid by a liquid. The behavior of a single drop on the surface of a solid tells you a lot about its properties. An obvious example is the application of different types of coatings and surface treatments. For example, if contact angle between the paint and the surface to be painted is high, that will lead to poor spreading and non-uniform coating. Contact angles can also be used to check if a surface treatment has been successful. Plasma treatment is often utilized to improve the adhesion between the substrate and the coating to be applied. The low contact angle between water and treated substrate indicate the success of the surface treatment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To measure contact angle, place a drop of liquid is placed on the surface. Low contact angle values, i.e. below 90°, are related to good wetting whereas high contact angle values, above 90°, indicate poor wetting. When the contact angle is 0°, the surface is said to wet completely. If the liquid applied on the surface is water, terms hydrophilic and hydrophobic are used, respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3phasepoint.PNG|thumb|Three-phase contact point where solid, fluid and fluid meet]]&lt;br /&gt;
The contact angle is geometrically defined as the angle formed by a liquid at the three-phase boundary where a liquid, gas, and solid intersect. There are three different forces acting on this three-phase contact point between solid, fluid and fluid&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \lambda_{lv} &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is the surface tension of a liquid, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \lambda_{sl} &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is the interfacial tension between the solid and liquid and &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \lambda_{sv} &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is the surface tension of the solid i.e. surface free energy. The well-known Young´s equation describes the balance at the three-phase contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \lambda_{sv} = \lambda_{sl} + \lambda_{lv}cos(\theta_y) &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The interfacial tensions, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \lambda_{sv}, \lambda_{sl}, \lambda_{lv} &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; form the equilibrium contact angle of wetting, many times referred to Young´s contact angle &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \theta_y &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References == &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Equipment|meas]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=UV-Vis_Spectroscopy&amp;diff=39223</id>
		<title>UV-Vis Spectroscopy</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=UV-Vis_Spectroscopy&amp;diff=39223"/>
		<updated>2021-10-06T03:08:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{|class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; | Avantes AvaSpec UV-Vis System [https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/sop/uv-vis/ [SOP&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:UVvis-052621.png|center|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Wavelength range&#039;&#039;&#039;:	200-1100 nm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Resolution&#039;&#039;&#039;:	0.06-20 nm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Stray light&#039;&#039;&#039;:	0.19-1.0%&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Sensitivity&#039;&#039;&#039;: 375,000 (counts/µW/ms integration time)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The UV-Vis (ultraviolet-visible) spectrophotometer is a machine that can measure many optical properties of a sample. These properties include transmittance, absorption, and reflectance of light. The spectroscope is able to analyze both solid and liquid specimens. The machine runs through the AvaSoft 8 software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Principle ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:UVVisDiagram.PNG|thumb|left|Components of a typical UV-Vis spectrometer.]]&lt;br /&gt;
A beam of light from a visible and/or UV light source (colored red) is separated into its component wavelengths by a prism or diffraction grating &amp;lt;ref Name = &amp;quot;MSU&amp;quot;&amp;gt; UV-Visible Spectroscopy. (n.d.). https://www2.chemistry.msu.edu/faculty/reusch/virttxtjml/spectrpy/uv-vis/uvspec.htm#uv1. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;. Each monochromatic (single wavelength) beam in turn is split into two equal intensity beams by a half-mirrored device. One beam, the sample beam (colored magenta), passes through a small transparent container (cuvette) containing a solution of the compound being studied in a transparent solvent. The other beam, the reference (colored blue), passes through an identical cuvette containing only the solvent. The intensities of these light beams are then measured by electronic detectors and compared. The intensity of the reference beam, which should have suffered little or no light absorption, is defined as &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; I_0 &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. The intensity of the sample beam is defined as &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; I &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. Over a short period of time, the spectrometer automatically scans all the component wavelengths in the manner described. The ultraviolet (UV) region scanned is normally from 200 to 400 nm, and the visible portion is from 400 to 800 nm. PMMA, PS, or glass cuvettes are used when the primary wavelengths of interest are in the visible range and quartz cuvettes are used when those wavelengths are between 170 and 300 nm, because they are more transparent to these wavelengths.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Typical Plot.PNG|thumb|Typical UV-Vis absorption plot]]&lt;br /&gt;
== Absorption and Transmittance ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the sample compound does not absorb light of a given wavelength, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; I_0 = I. &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; However, if the sample compound absorbs light then &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; I &amp;lt; I_0 &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, and this difference may be plotted on a graph versus wavelength. Absorption may be presented as transmittance &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; (T = I/I_0) &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; or absorbance &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; (A= log \frac{I_0}{I}) &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. If no absorption has occurred, &#039;&#039;T = 1.0&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;A= 0&#039;&#039;. Most spectrometers display absorbance on the vertical axis, and the commonly observed range is from 0 (100% transmittance) to 2 (1% transmittance). The wavelength of maximum absorbance is a characteristic value, designated as &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \lambda_{max} &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Different compounds may have very different absorption maxima and absorbances. Intensely absorbing compounds must be examined in dilute solution, so that significant light energy is received by the detector, and this requires the use of completely transparent (non-absorbing) solvents. The most commonly used solvents are water, ethanol, hexane and cyclohexane. Solvents having double or triple bonds, or heavy atoms (e.g. S, Br &amp;amp; I) are generally avoided. Because the absorbance of a sample will be proportional to its molar concentration in the sample cuvette, a corrected absorption value known as the molar absorptivity is used when comparing the spectra of different compounds. Molar Absorptivity &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; (\epsilon) &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is defined by: &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \epsilon = \frac{A}{cl} &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, where &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; A &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; = absorbance, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;c &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; = sample concentration in moles/liter &amp;amp; &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;l &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; = length of light path through the cuvette in cm (1cm for the MILL&#039;s UV-Vis) .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References == &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Equipment|meas]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Infrared_Camera&amp;diff=39222</id>
		<title>Infrared Camera</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Infrared_Camera&amp;diff=39222"/>
		<updated>2021-10-06T03:08:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{|class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; | FLIR ETS320 Infrared Camera [https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/sop/ir-camera/ [SOP&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:FLIR-052621.png|center|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Max Temperature&#039;&#039;&#039;: 250&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;^\circ&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Accuracy&#039;&#039;&#039;: &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\pm&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;^\circ&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;C&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Infrared Cameras are used for thermal imaging and display the surface temperature of object in a heat map. The primary use of the FLIR Infrared Camera is for imaging heat transfer in electronic components.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Principle ==&lt;br /&gt;
Thermal imaging cameras have lenses, just like visible light cameras &amp;lt;ref Name=&amp;quot;FLIR&amp;quot;&amp;gt; Elevology. (n.d.). Beginners Guide to Infrared Camera Technology. Ajax Environmental &amp;amp;amp; Safety Supply, Inc. https://www.thermalcamerarentals.com/resource-center/beginners-guide-to-infrared-camera-technology. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; . However, these specialized lenses on focuses infrared light emitted by all of the objects in view. The focused light is scanned by a phased array of infrared-detector elements. The detector elements create a very detailed temperature pattern called a thermogram. It only takes about one-thirtieth of a second for the detector array to obtain the temperature information to make the thermogram. This information is obtained from several thousand points in the field of view of the detector array.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The thermogram created by the detector elements is translated into electric impulses. The impulses are sent to a signal-processing unit, a circuit board with a dedicated chip that translates the information from the elements into data for the display. The signal-processing unit sends the information to the display, where it appears as various colors depending on the intensity of the infrared emission. The combination of all the impulses from all of the elements creates the image.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Heat sensed by an infrared camera can be very precisely quantified, or measured, allowing one to not only monitor thermal performance, but also identify and evaluate the relative severity of heat-related problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References == &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Equipment|meas]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Moisture_Analyzer&amp;diff=39221</id>
		<title>Moisture Analyzer</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Moisture_Analyzer&amp;diff=39221"/>
		<updated>2021-10-06T03:07:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{|class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; | OHAUS MB120 Moisture Analyzer [https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/sop/moisture-analyzer/ [SOP&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:MoistureAnalyzer-062721.png|center|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Sample Size:&#039;&#039;&#039;	0.5 g – 120 g&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Readability Moisture Content:&#039;&#039;&#039;	1 mg/0.01%&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Pan Size:&#039;&#039;&#039;	3.5 in (90 mm)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Heating Profiles:&#039;&#039;&#039;	Standard,  Ramp,  Step,  Fast&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Temperature Range:&#039;&#039;&#039;	40 °C – 230 °C&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
The moisture analyzer provides precise measurements of moisture content in liquid, paste, and solid materials.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Principle ==&lt;br /&gt;
The MILL&#039;s moisture analyzer measures moisture via the loss on drying technique.  These type of moisture analyzers define moisture as the loss of mass observed when the sample is heated and is based, in the­ory, on the vaporization of water during the drying process; this measurement does not distinguish weight loss of water from loss of volatile components or sample decomposition.  A heating element (such as a halogen bulb) dries a sample by transferring energy using both radiation and conductive heat transfer, and a precision balance that monitors the weight loss during the drying process.  The loss on drying technique is universally recognized as an efficient, reliable, and cost-effective method for determining moisture content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Designing Testing Protocol ==&lt;br /&gt;
When designing and optimizing the testing protocol, it is important to understand your material. Consider the following before getting started: approximation of moisture content, sensitivity to heat, and the physical state of the sample.[[File:GoodCurve.PNG|thumb|left|Representation of asymptotic curve, steady-state weight]]&lt;br /&gt;
The most common way to develop a method for a particular substance is to obtain a reference value, then build a method to reproduce the target value with the shortest possible drying time. To obtain a reference value, use the conventional LOD procedure and an analyzer and drying oven. Once a reference value has been obtained, one can begin to develop an appropriate method on a moisture analyzer. It is recommended to prepare a sample and dry it using a best-guess temperature, then analyze the resulting drying curve.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Understanding the drying curve generated during sample drying will help to define appropriate test conditions for the sample. Asymptotic drying curves are indicative of samples which reach a constant moisture value during the drying process. Optimizing the temperature profile and shut-off criterion is generally simple, resulting in repeatable data.[[File:BadCurve.PNG|thumb|left|Representation of drying curve which does not reach constant weight]]In the first example curve, the sample has reached a steady state and achieved the automatic shut-off criterion. If the final value achieved is lower than the expected value, this indicates that the temperature is not high enough to release all the bound moisture; increase the temperature and repeat the measurement until an optimal temperature is achieved. Conversely, if the resulting value is too high, this could indicate that the sample has changed composition (burned); decrease the temperature and repeat the measurement. It is important to visually inspect the sample to determine if burning or charring has taken place. In other cases, samples may never reach a constant weight throughout the drying process, resulting in a drying profile similar to that illustrated in the second example curve. This type of curve is indicative of a sample undergoing thermal decomposition or continual vaporization of volatile components. Optimization in this case may require lowering the temperature profile used for drying. Timed switch-off and consistent initial sample weight also help improve repeatability&lt;br /&gt;
The goal when developing a method is to achieve the fastest drying time and most repeatable results. Several measurements should be made to identify and validate a sound method. Please note that the result may not indicate the actual moisture content, but instead serve an analog or proxy to the moisture value (i.e., while the final value is not the full and true moisture content, deviations in the actual moisture content of a sample can be detected).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Drying Profiles ==&lt;br /&gt;
Moisture content (MC) is greatly influenced by the drying temperature used to drive off the moisture. Excessive heating may result in a high percentage MC reading due to sample decomposition or changes in chemical structure. Besides giving artificially high readings, results are very difficult to reproduce in tests when the drying profile is too harsh. Conversely, lower heating levels may preserve sample integrity but prolong the drying process, making the test unrealistic for process use. The MB Series of moisture analyzers offers a series of drying programs that allows users to customize the sample drying profile. By customizing the drying program, moisture measurements can be optimized to enhance drying conditions and shorten runtime while minimizing sample decomposition or change in chemical structure, ultimately improving testing accuracy and reproducibility. The four basic temperature profiles—standard, fast, step, and ramp—can be customized by specifying a target temperature(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Standard ===&lt;br /&gt;
The standard drying profile is the most common and is sufficient for most samples. In this drying profile the target temperature is reached and sustained until the end of the measurement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fast ===&lt;br /&gt;
The fast drying profile is suitable for samples with higher moisture content, as it relies on available moisture to prevent charring of the sample. In this drying profile, the target temperature is exceeded by 40% for the first 3 minutes, then reverts to the target temperature which is sustained until the end of the measurement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Step ===&lt;br /&gt;
The step drying profile allows for multiple temperatures to be sustained for defined periods of time, allowing for tighter control of the drying temperature. This profile can be useful for samples in which a lower temperature is first used to dry and measure surface moisture and a higher temperature to release and measure bound moisture. Alternatively, a higher temperature may be used first to burn off volatile solvents, then a lower temperature(s) can be used to measure water content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Ramp ===&lt;br /&gt;
The gentle ramp drying profile allows the user to ramp up the temperature slowly over a period of time. This can be useful to dry a substance with a high sugar content, where a slow temperature ramp will increasingly allow bound water to be evaporated before a caramelized layer is formed, trapping bound water underneath.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Shut-Off Criteria ==&lt;br /&gt;
A shut-off criterion defines when the moisture analyzer stops heating and considers a measurement complete. This can be done either manually or via several built-in options to ensure accurate, reproducible results. When and how the instrument terminates a heating profile can be programmed according to runtime or according to steady-state weight conditions. The available switch-off criteria are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Manual – The user defines the end of the run and shuts off the instrument manually.&lt;br /&gt;
# Timed – Instrument shuts off automatically at a preset time during analysis (e.g., 10 minutes).&lt;br /&gt;
# Auto – The instrument automatically shuts off based on weight loss per unit time. For the built-in automatic shutoff criteria, the end of a measurement is reached when the overall change in weight observed is less than 1 milligram per period of time. The available preprogrammed choices are:&lt;br /&gt;
## A30 = &amp;lt; 1 mg. weight loss in 30 seconds (quick-drying samples/fast measurements)&lt;br /&gt;
## A60 = &amp;lt; 1 mg. weight loss in 60 seconds (most sample types)&lt;br /&gt;
## A90 = &amp;lt; 1 mg. weight loss in 90 seconds (slow-drying samples)&lt;br /&gt;
# AFREE – Auto-free switch-off; allows the user to define shut-off criteria according to weight loss per unit time&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Applications ==&lt;br /&gt;
Moisture content analysis is a critical component of material quality and essentially a function of quality control in most production and laboratory facilities. Excessive or deficient moisture content of a substance can adversely impact the physical properties of a material. Weight, thermal expansion, amalgamation, electrical conductivity, and microbial activity are some examples of the properties that can be altered by even a minute presence, or, conversely, an abundance of moisture.  In many industries it is important—if not critical—to measure the water content of substances in order to assess quality, adjust manufacturing processes, and ensure that products meet regulations and guidelines.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Equipment|meas]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Thermogravimetric_Analysis&amp;diff=39220</id>
		<title>Thermogravimetric Analysis</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Thermogravimetric_Analysis&amp;diff=39220"/>
		<updated>2021-10-06T03:07:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{|class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; | TGA [https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/sop/tga/ [SOP&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:TGA_080221.png|center|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Temperature Range:&#039;&#039;&#039; Ambient to 1000°C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Balance Capacity:&#039;&#039;&#039; 1500 mg&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Balance Precision:&#039;&#039;&#039; 0.001%&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thermogravimetric analysis (TGA) uses heat to force reactions and physical changes in materials&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;TGAoverview&amp;quot;&amp;gt; Intertek. (n.d.). Thermogravimetric Analysis (TGA) ASTM E1131, ISO 11358. https://www.intertek.com/polymers/testlopedia/tga-astm-e1131/. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;, and provides quantitative measurements of mass change associated with transition and thermal degradation. TGA records changes in a sample&#039;s mass from the dehydration, decomposition, and oxidation of a sample against changes in time and temperature. The characteristic thermogravimetric curves of materials and chemical compounds are given by unique sequences of physicochemical reactions, which occur at specific temperature ranges and heating rates depending on the sample&#039;s molecular structure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Principle ==&lt;br /&gt;
For classic thermogravimetry, a sample is usually put into a crucible out of inert material (e.g. platinum, alumina, gold…) and placed on a sensor within a furnace that can apply controlled atmospheres and temperatures&amp;lt;ref Name=&amp;quot;Linseis&amp;quot;&amp;gt; Thermogravimetric analysis - analytical method of [mg]. Linseis Messgeräte GmbH. (2020, November 26). https://www.linseis.com/en/methods/thermogravimetric-analysis/. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;. The sensor is connected to a high-resolution microbalance that records the mass change during the experiment. In most thermogravimetric analyzers, compensation balances are used for this purpose. A compensation balance is a special version of a balance where an electric magnet compensates the applied mass-lab balances often work according to the same principle. While the sample sees a change in heat, the balance is usually kept in a static temperature environment in a separate chamber or at a certain distance from the sensor. The exact temperature of the sample is monitored by thermocouples that use the Seebeck-effect for precise temperature determination.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TGA Diagram.PNG|thumb|none|Sensor Setup in a typical thermogravimetric analyzer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Data Output &amp;amp; Analysis ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Typical Curve.PNG|thumb|Typical TGA curve &amp;lt;ref Name=&amp;quot;TGAguide&amp;quot;&amp;gt; A Beginner’s Guide to Thermogravimetric Analysis. FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS Thermogravimetric Analysis (TGA). (n.d.). https://resources.perkinelmer.com/lab-solutions/resources/docs/FAQ_Beginners-Guide-to-Thermogravimetric-Analysis_009380C_01.pdf. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
TGA gives a mass vs. temperature plot. The derivative of mass vs. temperature is known as “DTG”, and can also be plotted against temperature. The degradation temperature of samples can be found from the largest value of DTG (point of fastest degradation). The 5%, 50%, and 99% mass lost temperatures (where applicable) can be determined from the initial mass. The primary component of initial weight loss is usually evaporation of moisture and other volatiles. At larger values of weight loss weight loss the primary factors are typically pyrolysis, reduction, and desorption. Multistage decomposition is also common, and shows as a step-like pattern. In some cases, these steps may blend together during dynamic (continuous heating) TGA, necessitating either far slower heating rates, or step-wise methods like quasistatic (heating at intervals) TGA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While both inert (&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; N_2 &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; or noble gas) and oxidizing (&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; O_2 &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;) atmospheres can be used for TGA, the inert atmosphere is often preferred because it doesn’t interact with the sample and influence the collected data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Applications ==&lt;br /&gt;
Note that TGA itself may not be sufficient to identify the decomposition products; chemical testing of the sample after TGA analysis is often required to ascertain the identities of suspected decomposition products. TGA itself does not identify substances; other methods such as chemical testing or differential calorimetry must performed alongside TGA to verify the identity of products. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TGA is vital when designing materials that are intended to withstand high temperatures, as if there is even slight decomposition of the material at a temperature that the material would be expected to encounter, devices made of the material may fail over repeated use. The carefully controlled environment of the TGA analyzer also allows for measuring decomposition reaction kinetics. Differential scanning calorimetry can be incorporated into the TGA analyzer to allow for monitoring potential phase changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References == &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Equipment|meas]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Differential_Scanning_Calorimetry&amp;diff=39219</id>
		<title>Differential Scanning Calorimetry</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Differential_Scanning_Calorimetry&amp;diff=39219"/>
		<updated>2021-10-06T03:07:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{|class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; | Linseis Chip DSC 10 [https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/sop/dsc/ [SOP&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:DSC-052621.png|center|300px|]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Temperature:&#039;&#039;&#039; Range: -180°C (using LN2) to 500°&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Heating and cooling rates:&#039;&#039;&#039; 0.001 up to 250 K/min&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Resolution:&#039;&#039;&#039;	0.03 µW&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Measuring range:&#039;&#039;&#039; +/-2.5 up to +/-250 mW&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Linseis Differential Scanning Calorimeter  (DSC) is a thermal testing instrument used for measurements of material properties such as transformation temperatures, enthalpies of transformation, and heat capacities. It is capable of measuring temperatures up to 500°C and can use both solid and liquid specimens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Thermal Properties &amp;amp; Transitions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Heat Capacity ===&lt;br /&gt;
The heat capacity (&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; Cp &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;) of a system is the amount of heat needed to raise its temperature 1°C &amp;lt;ref Name=&amp;quot;PolymersDSC&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  (n.d.). (tech.). Investigation of Polymers with Differential Scanning Calorimetry. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;. It is usually given in units of Joules/°C and can be found from the heat flow and heating rate. The heat flow is the amount of heat (&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; q &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;) supplied per unit time (&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \frac{q}{t} &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;). The heating rate is the time rate change of temperature &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \frac{\Delta T}{t} &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; where &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \Delta T &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is the change in temperature. One can obtain the heat capacity from these quantities &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; Cp = \frac{q/t}{\Delta T/t} = \frac {q}{\Delta T}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. This means the heat capacity can be found by dividing the heat flow by the heating rate. If the &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; Cp &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; of a material is constant over some temperature range, then the plot of heat flow against temperature will be a line with zero slope as shown in the figure. If the heating rate is constant, the distance between the line and the x axis is proportional to the heat capacity. If heat is plotted against temperature, the heat capacity is found from the slope.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:GlassTransition.PNG|thumb|500px|left|Schematics of a glass transition. The glass transition results in a kink in the heat versus temperature plot due to the change in heat capacity (A). In a plot of heat flow versus temperature it is a gradual transition that occurs over a range of temperatures (B). The glass transition temperature is taken to be the middle of the sloped region.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Glass Transition ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Crystallization.PNG|thumb|Example of a crystallization ‘peak’ in a plot of heat flow against temperature. Crystallization is an exothermic process, so the heat flow to the sample must be decreased to maintain a constant heating rate.]]&lt;br /&gt;
If a molten polymer is cooled it will at some point reach its glass transition temperature (&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; T_g &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;). At this point, the mechanical properties of the polymer change from those of an elastic material to those of a brittle one due to changes in chain mobility. &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; C_p &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; of polymers is usually higher above &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; T_g &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. DSC is a valuable method to determine &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; T_g &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. It is important to note that the transition does not occur suddenly at one unique temperature but rather over a range of temperatures. The temperature in the middle of the inclined region is taken as the &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; T_g &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Crystallization ===&lt;br /&gt;
Above the glass transition temperature the polymer chains have high mobility. At some temperature above &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; T_g &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, the chains have enough energy to form ordered arrangements and undergo crystallization. Cold crystallization is an exothermic process that occurs during heating and consists of previously amorphous regions rearranging themselves into new crystallites from the thermal energy being put into the polymer during heating. Such a crystallization &#039;peak&#039; can be used to confirm that crystallization occurs in the sample, find the crystallization temperature (&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; T_c &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;), and determine the latent heat of crystallization. The crystallization temperature is defined as the lowest point of the dip. The latent heat (enthalpy) of crystallization is determined from the area under the curve. Cold crystallization can occur when a semi-crystalline polymer has been rapidly quenched during processing, so it has been frozen in an amorphous state. Re-crystallization is also exothermic, but occurs during cooling and arranges molten polymer chains into ordered crystalline structures.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Melting ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The polymer chains are able to move around freely at the melting temperature (&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; T_m &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;) and thus do not have ordered arrangements. Melting is an endothermic process, requiring the absorption of heat. The temperature remains constant during melting despite continued heating. The energy added during this time is used to melt the crystalline regions and does not increase the average kinetic energy of the chains that are already in the melt. In a plot of heat against temperature this appears as a jump discontinuity at the melting point. The heat added to the system during the melting process is the latent heat (enthalpy) of melting and can be calculated from the area of a melting peak observed in a plot of heat flow against temperature. The &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; T_m &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is defined as the temperature at the peak apex. After melting, the temperature again increases with heating. [[File:POlymersHeating.PNG|thumb|Typical DSC heating plot for a polymer that undergoes a glass transition, crystallization and melting.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== DSC Heating Curves of Polymers ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is worth noting that not all polymers undergo all three of the aforementioned transitions during heating. The crystallization and melting peaks are only observed for polymers that can form crystals. While purely amorphous polymers will only undergo a glass transition, crystalline polymers typically possess amorphous domains and will also exhibit a glass transition. The amorphous portion only undergoes the glass transition while the crystalline regions only undergo melting. The exact temperatures at which the polymer chains undergo these transitions depend on the structure of the polymer. Subtle changes in polymer structure can result in huge changes in &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; T_g &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. In a perfectly crystalline polymer, the plot of heat against temperature has a jump discontinuity at the melting point. The plot of heat against temperature is continuous for the glass transition, but plot is not smooth (the slope at &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; T_g &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is different depending on if you approach the point from the right or the left).&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Iron.PNG|thumb|left|DSC curve showing phase transitions of iron &amp;lt;ref Name=&amp;quot;Iron&amp;quot;&amp;gt; Metals &amp;amp;amp; Alloys. NETZSCH Analyzing &amp;amp;amp; Testing. (n.d.). https://www.netzsch-thermal-analysis.com/us/materials-applications/metals-alloys/. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== DSC Curves of Metals ==&lt;br /&gt;
In metals, heat capacity and melting/solidification information can be determined through DSC, as well as other solid-solid transitions such as the Curie transition (where magnetic properties change from ferromagnetic to paramagnetic) and transitions between different types of crystal structure. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Test Parameters==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PLA.PNG|thumb|400px|DSC Plot showing multiple heatings of a PLA sample (exothermic up)]]&lt;br /&gt;
DSC has several test parameters that are crucial to set to proper values based on the sample(s) being tested in order to obtain the best data possible. These include the endpoints, ramp rate, and number of heating/cooling cycles. The endpoints when testing an unknown polymer should be determined by the maximum temperature that the DSC model is capable of and the degradation temperature of that polymer (can be found from TGA). Changing the ramp rate of the DSC can affect the sensitivity and resolution of the measurements and the appearance of the curves. A high ramp rate (such as 50°C/min) increases sensitivity at the cost of resolution, while a very low ramp rate (0.1°C/min) could cause the sample to undergo unwanted annealing/crystallization. Multiple heating/cooling curves are used when a polymer has undergone processing to find its intrinsic values, while the first heating curve shows any processing the polymer has undergone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a situation where the initial heating curve of a semi-crystalline polymer such as PET shows a certain &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; T_g &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; T_c &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, and &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; T_m, &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; the cooling rate can have a significant effect on the values of these parameters found in the following heating cycle. For a slow cool (~1°C/min) these values would be expected to decrease, while they would be expected to increase due to a very fast cool (~1000°C/min). &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \Delta H_c &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; would be expected to decrease while &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \Delta H_m &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; would be expected to increase in the slow cool and while the opposite would be expected in the fast cool.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Additional Analysis ==&lt;br /&gt;
The enthalpy values of cold crystallization (&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \Delta H_c &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;), melting (&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \Delta H_m &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;), and recrystallization (&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \Delta H_{rc} &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;) transitions (where applicable) for each sample can be determined from trapezoidal Riemann sums which calculate the area under each peak. The heat capacity of each sample (&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; C_p &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;) at a certain temperature can be calculated by dividing the heat flow at that temperature by the heating rate (typically 10 degrees/min). The percentage crystallinity (&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; X_C &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;) can be calculated from the following equation: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; X_C = \frac{\Delta H_m}{\Delta H^\circ_m} \cdot 100\% &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;                       &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \Delta H^\circ_m &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is the melting enthalpy for a 100% crystalline sample (found in literature).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References == &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Equipment|meas]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Microhardness&amp;diff=39218</id>
		<title>Microhardness</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Microhardness&amp;diff=39218"/>
		<updated>2021-10-06T03:06:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{|class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; | LECO Microhardness Tester [https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/sop/microhardness-tester/ [SOP&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Microhardness-052621.png|center|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Objectives&#039;&#039;&#039;: 10x, 50x&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Indenters&#039;&#039;&#039;: Vickers, Knoop&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Load Force&#039;&#039;&#039;: 5-2000gf (0.05-19.61N)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Dwell Time&#039;&#039;&#039;: 0-20s&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Standard Comformation:&#039;&#039;&#039; ASTM E-384, JIS B-7734, ISO 4545 (Knoop), and ISO 6507 (Vickers)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The LECO LM 248 AT is a hardness tester that is designed to measure the hardness of materials on the microscopic level. The machine can magnify a surface as much as 50x and measure the hardness of a sample on the Vickers, Knoop, and Rockwell C scales. Hardness testing is used for two general characterizations: material characteristics (such as confirming material, testing hardenability, and predicting tensile strength) or functionality (testing wear resistance, toughness, and resistance to impact).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hardness tests are a simple method to determine the resistance of a metal to plastic deformation.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;Meyers&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Meyers, M., &amp;amp;amp; Chawla, K. (2016). Hardness. In Mechanical Behavior of Materials (2nd ed., pp. 214–225). chapter, Cambridge University Press.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Indentation tests constitute the vast majority of hardness tests and can be divided into three classes: nanoindentation, microindentation, and macroindentation (based on the indentation load used). The smaller the indentation, the harder the material. Both the yield stress and the work-hardening characteristics of the metal are important in determining the hardness. Hardness is not considered a fundamental property of a material; it represents a quantity measure on an arbitrary scale. There are several different methods used for hardness testing, which use varying shapes of indenters and loads. The MILL’s Leco LM 248AT comes with Vickers and Knoop indenters and calculates Rockwell C hardness from whichever of these scales is being used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Preparation == &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following precautions are recommended for reproducible results in hardness testing:&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;NEWAGE&amp;quot;&amp;gt; NEWAGE Hardness Testers. (n.d.). Hardness Testing Basics. NEWAGE Hardness Testers - Rockwell Testers, Brinell Testers, Microhardness Testers, Optical Systems and Hardness Testing Software. https://www.hardnesstesters.com/test-types/hardness-testing-basics. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The indenter and anvil should be clean and well seated.&lt;br /&gt;
# The surface to be tested should be clean, dry, smooth, and free from oxide. A rough-ground surface is usually adequate for a Vickers macro-hardness test, while the Knoop indenter requires pre-polishing of the surface to a microscopic grade.&lt;br /&gt;
# The surface should be flat and perpendicular to the indenter. Any specimen movement during indentation can cause deformed indents.&lt;br /&gt;
# The thickness of the specimen should be such that a mark or bulge is not produced on the reverse side of the piece. It is recommended that the thickness be at least 10 times the depth of the indentation. Tests should be made on only a single thickness of material.&lt;br /&gt;
# The spacing between indentations should be at least 3 times the longest dimension of the indentation, to avoid interaction between the work-hardening regions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Macro-indentation Tests == &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Hardness1.png|thumb|600px|Diagram of Rockwell Test]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Rockwell test is popular and convenient, since there is no need to measure the depth or width of the indentation optically. This testing procedure is illustrated below. A preload is applied prior to the application of the main load. The dial of the machine provides a number that is related to the depth of the indentation produced by the main load. A Brale indenter, a diamond cone with an angle of 120°, is used in Rockwell C tests. The Rockwell C scale is usually used for harder steels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Vickers test uses a diamond pyramidal indenter with a square base, with an angle between the faces of 136°. One of the known advantages of the Vickers test is that one indenter covers all the materials, from the softest to the hardest. The load is increased with hardness, and there is a continuity in scale. The Vickers hardness (HV) is computed from the equation below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;HV = \frac{2P \cdot \mathrm{sin(\alpha/2)}}{d^2} \approx \frac{1.8544P}{d^2}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
where P is the applied load (in kgf), d is the average length of the diagonals (in mm), and α is the angle between the opposite faces of the indenter (136°). Conversion to MPa is accomplished by multiplying this value by 9.81. After the indentation, both diagonals of impression are measured, and their average is taken. If the surface is cylindrical or spherical, a correction factor (ASTM Standard E92, Tables 4 through 6) has to be introduced. Microhardness tests utilize a load lighter than 200 gf, and very minute impressions are thus formed; a load of 200 gf produces an indentation of about 50 μm for a medium-hardness metal. These tests are ideally suited to investigate changes in hardness at the microscopic scale. One can measure the hardness of a second-phase particle and identify regions within a grain where differences in hardness occur. Micro-hardness tests are also used to perform routine tests on very small precision components, such as parts of watches. When a metal is alloyed, the distribution of the solute is not even throughout the grain, due to the stress fields produced by the solute atom. The solute atoms often tend to segregate at the grain boundaries, significantly increasing or decreasing the hardness in these areas. This effect can be noted at extremely low concentrations of solute (a few parts per million).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Micro-indentation Tests ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screen Shot 2021-06-09 at 10.18.04 AM.png|thumb|539x539px|Shapes of Vickers (VK) and Knoop (HK) indenters, depth and minimum sample thickness requirements of each indenter.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;LECO Corporation. (2017). &#039;&#039;Lm Series Digital Microindentation Tester Instruction Manual&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
The two most common micro-indentation tests are the Knoop and Vickers tests. The Knoop indenter is an elongated square pyramid, while Vickers indenter is a regular square pyramid. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The hardness is obtained from the surface area of the impression and is given by:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; KHN = \frac {14229P}{L^2} &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
where P is the load of gf and L is the length of the major diagonal, in micrometers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Dwell Time ===&lt;br /&gt;
The ASTM specification for dwell time is 10 to 15 seconds. The dwell time can be changed to meet a specific requirement. As a general rule, a shorter load time is preferable as it reduces the chances of outside influence (vibration, etc.) on the tester.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:0&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Distance Between Indentations ===&lt;br /&gt;
Spacing indentations too close together can cause the test piece to become “work hardened” in that area, resulting in false readings. Be sure to maintain proper spacing between indents, in all directions. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Vickers vs. Knoop ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Vickers Hardness test has two significant advantages:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Geometrically similar indentations and relatively constant hardness values are obtained, regardless of the loads applied, as long as test specimens are homogeneous.  &lt;br /&gt;
* Materials ranging from extremely soft to extremely hard can be tested without changing loads.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Knoop Hardness test should only be used for measurement of extremely thin plates and brittle materials that cannot be measured by ordinary Vickers Hardness tests. The geometric shape of Knoop indents does vary with the load used.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Micro-hardness vs. Macro-hardness ===&lt;br /&gt;
There are several problems with the extrapolation of micro-indentation testing to macro indentation results. First, almost invariably, the micro-hardness of any material is higher than its standard macro-hardness. Additionally, the micro-hardness varies with load. Second, there is a tendency for the micro-hardness to increase (up to a few grams); then the hardness value drops with load. At very low loads, one is essentially measuring the hardness of a single grain; the indenter ‘‘sees” a single crystal, and the plastic deformation produced by the indentation is contained in this grain. As the load is increased, plastic deformation of adjoining grains is involved, and a truly polycrystalline deformation regimen is achieved. Grain size has a marked effect on the yield strength and work-hardening characteristics of metals. Yet another potential source of error is the work-hardening introduced in the surface by polishing. The effect of crystallographic orientation, when the impression is restricted to a single grain, is of utmost importance. It is well known that both the yield stress and the work-hardening are dependent on the crystallographic orientation of the material. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Relationships Between Yield Stress and Hardness == &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For non-work-hardening (brittle) materials, hardness is equal to three times the yield stress (H = 3σ&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;). Since there is a lot of plastic deformation under the indenter, in work-hardening (ductile) materials yield strain cannot be used. The mean plastic strain under the indenter is described by the following equation: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; {ε_p} = \frac{d′}{5D} &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
where d′ is the diameter at the top of the pileup and D is the diameter of the indenter. For d′/D = 0.375, a reasonable value for indentation, the plastic strain, εp = 0.075. Hence, for work-hardening metals, one should take the flow stress at a plastic strain of 0.375 before multiplying it by 3 for a good correlation with the hardness.&lt;br /&gt;
== Converting Between Scales ==&lt;br /&gt;
If the desired hardness scale cannot be measured by the Leco tester, a conversion table such as [https://pgisteel.com/hardness-conversion-chart/ this]&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;Conversion&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &#039;&#039;Hardness Conversion Chart&#039;&#039;. PGI Steel. (n.d.). https://pgisteel.com/hardness-conversion-chart/ &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;. may be used to find the value on the desired scale. It should be noted that not all hardness scales cover the same range or are designed for the same materials. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References == &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Equipment|meas]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Mechanical_Testing&amp;diff=39217</id>
		<title>Mechanical Testing</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Mechanical_Testing&amp;diff=39217"/>
		<updated>2021-10-06T03:06:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{|class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; | Mark-10 ESM303 [https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/sop/mark-10/ [SOP&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; | Instron 5967 [https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/sop/instron/ [SOP&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;||[[File:Mark10-052621.png|center|250px]]||[[File:Instron-052621.png|center|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Load Cells&#039;&#039;&#039;:||500 mN, 25 N, 500 N, 1500 N||30 kN&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Load Capacity&#039;&#039;&#039;:||1.5 kN @ up to 610 mm/min||30 kN&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Speed range&#039;&#039;&#039;:||13 - 330 mm/min||0.001 mm/min - 1000 mm/min&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Travel range&#039;&#039;&#039;:||45.7 cm||1.212 m&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Max width&#039;&#039;&#039;:||n/a||0.418 m&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Mark-10 ESM303 Mechanical Tester is a mechanical testing frame capable of testing materials under tensile, cyclic, compressive, and 3-point bending modes. This machine has several load cells: a 1500 N, a 500 N, a 25 N, and a 500 mN load cell.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Instron Mechanical Tester is a mechanical testing frame capable of testing materials under tensile, compressive, and 3-point-bending modes. This machine is equipped with a 30kN load cell.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Loading ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loading.PNG|thumb|350px|left|1. Compression 2. Tension 3. Shear 4. Torsion 5. Bending]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A material in service is subjected to different forces. Depending on the magnitude of these forces, the metal may or may not change its shape. The act of applying the force is known as loading. There are several different ways in which these forces may be applied on a part, including compression, tension, and bending. &amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;Velling&amp;quot;&amp;gt; Velling, A. (2021, May 5). Stress-Strain Curve: How to Read the Graph? Fractory. https://fractory.com/stress-strain-curve/. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; &amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;Meyers&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Meyers, M., &amp;amp;amp; Chawla, K. (2016). Hardness. In Mechanical Behavior of Materials (2nd ed., pp. 214–225). chapter, Cambridge University Press.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Stress and Strain ==&lt;br /&gt;
Stress is defined as the ratio of applied force to the cross-sectional area of the material it is applied to. The formula for calculating (true) material stress is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \sigma_t =\frac{F}{A}, &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where &#039;&#039;F&#039;&#039; is force, &#039;&#039;A&#039;&#039; is area, and  &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \sigma  &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is stress. Stress can be understood as an internal force induced in the material in response to an externally applied force (Newton’s 3rd law). It will try to resist any change in dimension caused by the external force. Strain is defined as the ratio of the change in dimension to the initial dimension of the metal. It does not have a unit (sometimes designated as length/length). The formula for calculating (true) strain is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \epsilon_t = \int_{l_0} ^l  \frac{dl}{l} =  ln(\frac{l}{l_0}), &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; l_0  &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is starting or initial length, &#039;&#039;l&#039;&#039; is current length, and &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \epsilon &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is strain.  In many applications, a simpler form of strain, commonly called engineering or nominal strain, is used. This type of strain is defined as&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \epsilon_e = \frac{(l-l_0)}{l_0} &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the strains are reasonably small, the engineering and true strains are approximately the same. The elastic deformation in metals and ceramics rarely exceeds 0.005, and for this value, the difference between &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \epsilon_t &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \epsilon_e &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; can be neglected. In a likewise fashion, engineering (nominal) stress is defined as:[[File:SScurve.PNG|thumb|Engineering stress-strain curve of a typical ductile material &amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;Roylance&amp;quot;&amp;gt; Roylance, D. (2001, August 23). STRESS-STRAIN CURVES.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;]] &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \sigma_e = \frac{F}{A_0} &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
where  &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; A_0  &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is the original area of cross-section.  Normal strain may be positive or negative depending on the external force’s directions and therefore effect on the original length. Tensile stresses and strains are considered to be positive while their compressive counterparts are considered to be negatives. While there are multiple types of stresses and strains, this article focuses on their normal longitudinal variants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tensile Testing &amp;amp; Engineering Stress-Strain Curves ==&lt;br /&gt;
The most common method to obtain a stress-strain curve is to subject a sample to a tensile test. When setup for tensile testing, the mechanical testers have two claws which hold the two extremes of the sample and pull it at a uniform rate. The force applied and the strain produced is recorded until a fracture occurs. The two parameters are then plotted on an X-Y graph to get a stress-strain curve. Note that the testers produces a force-travel plot (with the same general shape) that must be manually converted to a stress-strain curve using the aforementioned equations in conjunction with the sample dimensions (or entering the sample dimensions into the software on the Instron). There are various sections on the stress and strain curve (described below) that describe different behavior of a material depending on the amount of stress induced. Stress and strain curves for brittle and ductile materials are different. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BrittleSSCurve.PNG|thumb|300x300px|Typical stress-strain curve of a brittle material &amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;MechaniCalc&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Mechanical Properties of Materials. MechaniCalc. (n.d.). https://mechanicalc.com/reference/mechanical-properties-of-materials.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elastic &amp;amp; Plastic Deformation ==&lt;br /&gt;
In the early (low strain) portion of the curve, most materials obey Hooke’s Law &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; (F_s=kx) &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; to a reasonable approximation, with the constant of proportionality being the modulus of elasticity or Young’s modulus (E), described by the following equation:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \sigma_e = E\epsilon_e \rightarrow E= \frac{\sigma_e}{\epsilon_e} &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also known as the modulus of resilience, it is analogous to the stiffness of a spring (&#039;&#039;k&#039;&#039;). That’s also why Hooke’s Law includes a spring constant. Materials exhibit elastic flow (ability to return to their original shape upon unloading) up to a certain strain. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As strain is increased, many materials eventually deviate from the linear proportionality of Hooke’s Law, the point of departure being termed the proportional limit. This is usually associated with stress-induced “plastic” flow in the specimen. Here the material is undergoing a rearrangement of its internal molecular or microscopic structure, in which atoms are being moved to new equilibrium positions. This plasticity requires a mechanism for molecular mobility, which in crystalline materials can arise from dislocation motion. Materials lacking this mobility, for instance by having internal microstructures that block dislocation motion, are usually brittle rather than ductile (fail at lower rather than higher strains). The stress-strain curve for brittle materials are typically linear over their full range of strain, eventually terminating in fracture with no to minimal plastic flow (permanent deformation).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Yield Stress ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:0.2Offset.PNG|thumb|Graphical depiction of finding 0.2% offset yield strength (stress)]]&lt;br /&gt;
The stress needed to increase the strain beyond the proportional limit in a ductile material continues to rise beyond the proportional limit; the material requires an ever-increasing stress to continue straining, a mechanism termed strain hardening. Microstructural rearrangements associated with plastic flow are usually not reversed. The residual strain induced by a given stress can be determined by drawing an unloading line from the highest point reached on the engineering stress strain curve at that stress back to the strain axis, drawn with a slope equal to that of the initial elastic loading line. This is done because the material unloads elastically, there being no force driving the molecular structure back to its original position. A closely related term is the yield stress &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; (\sigma_y) &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;; this is the stress needed to induce plastic deformation in the specimen. Since it is often difficult to pinpoint the exact stress at which plastic deformation begins, the yield stress is often taken to be the stress needed to induce a specified amount of permanent strain, typically 0.2%. The construction used to find this “offset yield stress” is shown below, where a line of slope E is drawn from the strain axis at &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \epsilon = 0.2\% &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;; this is the unloading line that would result in the specified permanent strain. The stress at the point of intersection with the curve is the offset yield stress. Engineering calculations typically use a material’s yield strength for determining its ability to resist a load because if the load is greater than the yield strength, the result will be unwanted plastic deformation. See [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=p0TQ8SV0g2U&amp;amp;t=586s this video] for a detailed explanation of how to find the 0.2% offset yield stress &amp;amp; strain in Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Ultimate Strength ==&lt;br /&gt;
It appears that the rate of strain hardening decreases up to the ultimate strength (UTS), the greatest level of stress on the curve. Beyond that point, the material appears to strain soften, so that each increment of additional strain requires a smaller stress. The apparent change from strain hardening to strain softening is an artifact of the plotting procedure (using engineering rather than true values), as is the maximum observed in the curve at the UTS. Even though the UTS is perhaps the materials property most commonly reported in tensile tests, it is not a direct measure of the material due to the influence of geometry, and should be used with caution. The yield stress is usually preferred to the UTS in designing with ductile metals, although the UTS is a valid design criterion for brittle materials that do not exhibit flow-induced reductions in cross-sectional area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Necking ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Necking.PNG|thumb|Necking in a tensile specimen]]&lt;br /&gt;
The true stress is not quite uniform throughout the specimen, and there will always be some location - perhaps a nick or some other defect at the surface - where the local stress is maximum. Once the maximum in the engineering curve has been reached, the localized flow at this site cannot be compensated by further strain hardening, so the area there is reduced further. This increases the local stress even more, which accelerates the flow further. This localized and increasing flow soon leads to a “neck” in the gage length of the specimen such as that seen below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Until the neck forms, the deformation is essentially uniform throughout the specimen, but after necking all subsequent deformation takes place in the neck. The neck becomes smaller and smaller, local true stress increases all the time, until the specimen fails. This will be the failure mode for most ductile metals. As the neck shrinks, the nonuniform geometry there alters the uniaxial stress state to a complex one involving shear components as well as normal stresses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Drawing ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Drawing.PNG|thumb|Necking and drawing in a stress-strain curve]]&lt;br /&gt;
This figure shows the engineering stress-strain curve for a semi-crystalline thermoplastic. The response of this material is similar to that of typical metals, in that it shows a proportional limit followed by a maximum in the curve at which necking takes place. (This is commonly described in plastics as the yield stress, although plastic flow has begun at earlier strains.) The polymer, however, differs dramatically in that the neck does not continue shrinking until the specimen fails. Rather, the material in the neck stretches only to a “natural draw ratio” which is a function of temperature and specimen processing, beyond which the material in the neck stops stretching and new material at the neck shoulders necks down. The neck then propagates until it spans the full gage length of the specimen, a process called drawing. This process can be observed without the need for a testing machine, by stretching a “six-pack holder.” Not all polymers are able to sustain this drawing process. Drawing occurs when the necking process produces a strengthened microstructure whose breaking load is greater than that needed to induce necking in the untransformed material just outside the neck.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Failure ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BrittleDuctile.PNG|thumb|Smooth brittle fracture (left) and &amp;quot;cup and cone&amp;quot; shaped ductile fracture (right)]]&lt;br /&gt;
Ductile specimens often fail with a “cup and cone” geometry as seen below, in which the outer regions fail in shear and the interior in tension. When the specimen fractures, the engineering strain at break &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; (\epsilon_f) &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  will include the deformation in the necked region and the un-necked region together. Since the true strain in the neck is larger than that in the un-necked material, the value of &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; (\epsilon_f) &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  will depend on the fraction of the gage length that has necked. Therefore, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; (\epsilon_f) &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is a function of the specimen geometry as well as the material, and thus is only a crude measure of material ductility. Brittle specimen failure is characterized by very rapid cracking under stress while little or no evidence of ductility or plastic degradation before the fracture occurs. When a piece of equipment suffers a brittle fracture, there is no thinning or necking down. Rather, this damage mechanism often causes cracking without warning, sometimes fracturing equipment into many pieces. Brittle fracture is often caused by low temperatures. If a metal is at or below its brittle-to-ductile transition temperature, then it will be susceptible to brittle fracture. Critical sized flaws, metallurgical degradation, large grain sizes, and high thickness significantly increase the likelihood of a sample experiencing brittle fracture.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== True Stress-Strain Curve ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TrueSSC.PNG|thumb|A true stress-strain curve compared its engineering counterpart &amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;fracture&amp;quot;&amp;gt; United States Naval Academy. (n.d.). FRACTURE OF MATERIALS. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; ]]&lt;br /&gt;
During elastic deformation, the change in cross-sectional area is less than 1% for most metals and ceramics; thus &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \sigma_e ∼= \sigma_t &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. However, during plastic deformation, the differences between the true and the engineering values become progressively larger as the specimen dimensions experience substantial change from their original values. Due to this, the engineering stress-strain curve must be interpreted with caution beyond the elastic limits. Using the true stress &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \sigma_t = \frac{F}{A} &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; rather than the engineering stress &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \sigma_e = \frac{F}{A_0} &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; can give a more direct measure of the material’s response in the plastic flow range, although this requires using the following additional equations: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \epsilon_t =ln(1+\epsilon_e) &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \sigma_t = \sigma_e(1+\epsilon_e) &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ductile metals often have true stress-strain relations that can be described by a simple power-law relation of the form:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \sigma_t = A\epsilon_tn → log(\sigma_t) = log(A) + nlog(\epsilon_t) &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The strain hardening parameter (n), is the slope of the log-log plot, and is useful as a measure of the resistance to necking. Ductile metals at room temperature usually exhibit values of n from 0.02 to 0.5.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Toughness.PNG|thumb|Resilience and toughness shown graphically]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Strain Energy, Resilience, &amp;amp; Toughness ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EnergyDissipated.PNG|thumb|How to graphically determine energy dissipated in a plastically deformed (but not fractured) specimen ]]&lt;br /&gt;
The area under the engineering stress-strain curve up to a given value of strain is the total mechanical energy per unit volume consumed by the material in straining it to that value. This is easily shown as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; U^* = \frac {1}{V} \int FdL= \int_0^L \frac{FdL}{A_0L_0}= \int_0^{\epsilon}\sigma d\epsilon &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the absence of molecular slip and other mechanisms for energy dissipation, this mechanical energy is stored reversibly within the material as strain energy. The area up to the yield point is termed the modulus of resilience, and the total area up to fracture is termed the modulus of toughness.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The term “resilience” alludes to the concept that up to the point of yielding, the material is unaffected by the applied stress and upon unloading will return to its original shape. But when the strain exceeds the yield point, the material is deformed irreversibly, so that some residual strain will persist even after unloading. The modulus of resilience is then the quantity of energy the material can absorb without suffering damage. Similarly, the modulus of toughness is the energy needed to completely fracture the material. Materials showing good impact resistance, as well as ductile materials, are generally those with high moduli of toughness. The resilience &amp;amp; toughness integrals can be calculated from stress-strain data via methods such as [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=R8g3B2iySA4&amp;amp;ab_channel=StephanieGlen trapezoidal Riemann sums in Excel]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During loading, the area under the stress-strain curve is the strain energy per unit volume absorbed by the material. Conversely, the area under the unloading curve is the energy released by the material. In the elastic range, these areas are equal and no net energy is absorbed. But if the material is loaded into the plastic range as shown above, the energy absorbed exceeds the energy released and the difference is dissipated as heat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Compression ==&lt;br /&gt;
Materials that exhibit high tensile strength tend to (but do not always!) exhibit low compressive strength. Likewise, materials high in compressive strength tend to exhibit low tensile strength. Therefore, compression testing is often used on brittle materials such as concrete, metals, plastics, ceramics, composites, and corrugated materials like cardboard. These materials are often used in a load-bearing capacity where their integrity under compressive forces is critical.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unlike tensile tests, which are usually conducted to determine the tensile properties of a specific material, compression tests are often performed on finished products. Common items such as tennis balls, golf balls, water bottles, protective cases, plastic pipes, and furniture are all examples of products that need to be evaluated for their compressive strength. For example, an engineer may want to conserve plastic by creating water bottles with thinner walls, but the bottles must still be strong enough to be packed in pallets and stacked on top of each other for transport. Compression testing can help the engineer fine tune the balance between product strength and material conservation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As long as the loads are sufficiently small (stresses less than the proportional limit), in many materials the relations outlined for tensile testing apply equally well in compression. The expression for deformation &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; (\delta) &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; from a given load &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \delta = \frac{FL}{AE} &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
applies just as in tension, with negative values for δ and F indicating compression. Further, the modulus E is the same in tension and compression to a good approximation, and the stress-strain curve simply extends as a straight line into the third quadrant as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are some practical difficulties in performing stress-strain tests in compression. If excessively large loads are mistakenly applied in a tensile test, perhaps by wrong settings on the testing machine, the specimen simply breaks and the test must be repeated with a new specimen. But in compression, a mistake can easily damage the load cell or other sensitive components, since even after specimen failure the loads are not necessarily relieved. This is why when designing a method for the Instron tester, there must always be a second stop condition at 28kN load. The ultimate compressive strength of a material is the value of compressive stress reached when the material fails completely. When brittle materials reach their ultimate compressive strength they are crushed, and the load drops drastically. Materials with higher ductility, (most plastics) do not rupture, but instead continue deforming  until the load is no longer being applied to the specimen, but rather between the two compression platens. In these cases, compressive strength can be reported as specific deformations such as 1%, 5%, or 10% of the test specimen&#039;s original height. &amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;Instron&amp;quot;&amp;gt; Instron. (n.d.). What is Compression Testing? https://www.instron.us/en-us/our-company/library/test-types/compression-test. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Bend Testing ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BendVMDiagram.PNG|thumb|Diagram of a three point bend test, with graphs of bending moment &#039;&#039;M&#039;&#039;, shear &#039;&#039;Q&#039;&#039; and deflection &#039;&#039;w&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;Penn&amp;quot;&amp;gt; Penn Center for Musculoskeletal Disorders. Three Point and Four Point Bending | Penn Center for Musculoskeletal Disorders | Perelman School of Medicine at the University of Pennsylvania. (n.d.). https://www.med.upenn.edu/pcmd/3pt-4pt-bending.html. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
In bending tests, standardized, mostly cylindrical specimens are placed centrally on a test fixture. &amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;GOM&amp;quot;&amp;gt; Bending test: Suitable for both brittle and ductile materials. (n.d.). https://www.gom.com/en/topics/bend-test. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;  The rounded support rollers (bearings) are arranged parallel to each other at a certain distance (support width). The diameter of the cylindrical specimen is proportional to the support width of the bearings. The test punch, which moves down slowly and at a constant speed, loads the sample with increasing force until it breaks or reaches the previously determined deformation. Flexural modulus (elastic modulus in bending), stress-strain behavior, and failure limits can all be obtained using a bend test. &amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;Bruker&amp;quot;&amp;gt; 3-Point Bend Testing. Bruker. (n.d.). https://www.bruker.com/en/products-and-solutions/test-and-measurement/tribometers-and-mechanical-testers/3-point-bend-testing.html. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The 3-point bending test is the most frequently performed bending test. However, it has the disadvantage that in addition to the compressive and tensile forces exerted, transverse forces are also effective in the material.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During the test, the values of the bending force and deflection are recorded, which are then used to determine the material characteristics. The test sequence is plotted in a stress-strain curve and can also be recorded with a video camera. Bending tests are performed to obtain information about the bending behavior of the tested material from the single-axis bending stress. In case of brittle materials, the bending strength is determined this way.  For ductile materials, the limit yield point, greatest possible bending angle, and Young’s modulus are determined. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Calculation of the flexural stress &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\sigma_f&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\sigma_f = \frac{3 F L}{2 b d^2}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; for a rectangular cross section&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\sigma_f = \frac{F L}{\pi R^3}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; for a circular cross section&amp;lt;ref name=Biomaterials&amp;gt;&amp;quot;Chapter 4 Mechanical Properties of Biomaterials&amp;quot;. Biomaterials – The intersection of Biology and Material Science. New Jersey, United States: Pearson Prentice Hall. 2008. p. 152.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Calculation of the flexural strain &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\epsilon_f&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\epsilon_f = \frac{6Dd}{L^2}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Calculation of flexural modulus &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;E_f&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;Zweben&amp;quot;&amp;gt; Zweben, C., W. S. Smith, and M. W. Wardle (1979), &amp;quot;Test methods for fiber tensile strength, composite flexural modulus, and properties of fabric-reinforced laminates&amp;quot;, Composite Materials: Testing and Design (Fifth Conference), ASTM International&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;E_f = \frac{L^3 m}{4 b d^3}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
in these formulas the following parameters are used:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\sigma_f&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  = Stress in outer fibers at midpoint, (MPa)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\epsilon_f&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  = Strain in the outer surface, (mm/mm)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;E_f&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  = flexural Modulus of elasticity,(MPa)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;F&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;   = load at a given point on the load deflection curve, (N)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;L&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;   = Support span, (mm)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;b&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;   = Width of test beam, (mm)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;   = Depth or thickness of tested beam, (mm)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;D&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;   = maximum deflection of the center of the beam, (mm)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;   = The gradient (i.e., slope) of the initial straight-line portion of the load deflection curve, (N/mm)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;R&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;   = The radius of the beam, (mm)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a bending test, the bending stress is greatest in the center of the specimen (highest deflection). At this point, the greatest bending moment is always present. From the central pressure point, the bending moment decreases linearly in both directions toward the bearings. The material is subjected to pressure on its inner side and tension on its outer side. In the outer fibers of the specimen, the bending stress (tensile and compressive stress) is greatest and decreases inwards toward the neutral fiber. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a partially plastically deformed specimen is relieved during the bending test by raising the test punch, only the internal stresses (residual stresses) present in the material and the resulting torque are still effective. This will partially reshape the sample.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bending Behavior of Ductile Materials ===&lt;br /&gt;
If the bending stress in the sample made of a ductile material is lower than the limit stress of the plastic deformation, the bending stress is exclusively elastic. As the bending stress increases, the yield strength is exceeded first in the peripheral areas of the specimen. These areas then deform plastically (the so-called material flow). The limit yield point is the limit bending stress up to which easily deformable materials can be loaded by bending without permanent deformation in the marginal area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The moment this kind of deformation occurs can be determined directly from the deflection-force diagram, in a similar manner to how the yield strength is found in a tensile test. With deflection increasing steadily, more and more internal areas of the specimen are involved in the plastic deformation. This is a result of the stress increase. For steels, for example, the limit yield point is between 10 to 20 percent higher than the yield strength due to the linear stress increase. If the yield strength is exceeded in the edge fibers during the bending test, the inner and exclusively elastically stressed fibers impede the flow movement. Bending tests with ductile materials are different from those performed with brittle materials: Tough materials can be subjected to extreme plastic deformation, but they cannot be broken, no matter how strong the applied force is. Therefore, a bending test with a ductile sample is finished when the yield point is exceeded. The bending strength of ductile materials is determined by the point in time at which the plastic deformation occurs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bending Behavior of Brittle Materials ===&lt;br /&gt;
Specimens made of brittle materials show a different bending behavior during materials testing. They break without clearly visible material flow behavior. Therefore, the determination of the limit yield point is more complicated for brittle materials. In order to be able to determine the bending strength nevertheless, the maximum bending stress at which the sample breaks is determined. However, the bending strength is a fictitious value that is not identical to the bending stress actually occurring in the material. Another characteristic of bending tests with brittle materials is the fracture deflection. This technical term describes the greatest possible deflection of a specimen shortly before fracture.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fracture deflection depends on the support width: Larger distances between the bearings allow for greater deflections. In order to check the strength of brittle materials, the bending test is often more suitable than the tensile test, because the materials are subjected to bending stress only. If this sample were to be subjected to a tensile test, it would break prematurely and measurement problems would occur. For certain brittle materials, the tensile test is therefore replaced by the bending test. These materials include thermosetting sheets and molding materials, thermoplastic injection molding compounds, and fiber-reinforced plastics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Related Theory ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Cyclic Loading]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Stress Theory]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References == &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Equipment|meas]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=X-ray_Fluorescence&amp;diff=39216</id>
		<title>X-ray Fluorescence</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=X-ray_Fluorescence&amp;diff=39216"/>
		<updated>2021-10-06T02:59:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{|class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; | Niton FXL XRF [https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/sop/xrf/ [SOP&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:XRF-052621.png|center|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Elemental Range&#039;&#039;&#039;: Mg and up (Z &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\geq&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; 12)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;*Mg – S (12 ≤ Z ≤ 16) unreliable in low concentrations&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;*Cl and up (Z ≥ 17) detectable in low concentrations&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Chamber Dimensions&#039;&#039;&#039;: 9&amp;quot; &amp;lt;small&amp;gt;(L)&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt; x 12&amp;quot; &amp;lt;small&amp;gt;(W)&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt; x 4.5&amp;quot; &amp;lt;small&amp;gt;(H)&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Sample Type&#039;&#039;&#039;: Bulk, powders, &amp;amp; liquids/solutions&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;X-ray fluorescence spectroscopy (XRF)&#039;&#039;&#039;, also known as X-ray emission spectroscopy (XES), is a non-destructive characterization technique which gives elemental composition information. The MILL’s Niton FXL XRF accepts powdered, liquid, and bulk samples, and can detect elements heavier than magnesium (&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;Z\geq12&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;). It is best suited for ceramic and metallic samples.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Operation ==&lt;br /&gt;
Anyone who wishes to use or be trained on the XRD must undergo the general lab safety training &#039;&#039;&#039;AND&#039;&#039;&#039; the Georgia Tech Office of Radiological Safety (ORS) X-Ray Safety Training before reporting to the XRD Technical Officer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Theory ==&lt;br /&gt;
In an atom, electrons are bound to the nucleus with discrete binding energies—this is due to the quantized energy states we understand as “orbitals” or “shells.” When a material is struck by source radiation of sufficient energy, it dislodges a core electron, resulting in a &#039;&#039;vacancy&#039;&#039;. This vacancy now must be filled, or quenched, by a higher-energy electron. When quenched, the energy difference between the two electron levels is considered a surplus, and must be ejected either as a &#039;&#039;photon&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;electron&#039;&#039; of that specific energy difference. This specific energy difference is characteristic to each element, and the resulting signal is therefore indicative of a material’s elemental composition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fluorescence vs. Auger Behavior===&lt;br /&gt;
The two aforementioned post-quench behaviors during are competitive and are the basis behind two different characterization techniques. If the surplus energy is ejected as a photon, it is called a secondary photon—this is also known as fluorescence. If ejected as an electron, it is called an &#039;&#039;Auger (oh-ZHAY) electron&#039;&#039;. The two corresponding techniques are subsequently called &#039;&#039;&#039;X-ray fluorescence spectroscopy (XRF)&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Auger electron spectroscopy (AES)&#039;&#039;&#039;, and both use X-rays as the source radiation. Note that XRF is the same thing as X-ray emission spectroscopy (XES), since the detector is measuring the count and intensity of secondary X-rays. Typically, fluorescence is favored in heavier elements, and Auger behavior is favored in lighter elements—this is part of the reason why our XRF (and all XRFs) struggle to detect lighter elements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== XRF vs. EDS ===&lt;br /&gt;
Note that XRF is a similar technique to the EDS/EDX (Energy Dispersive X-ray Spectroscopy) systems found in SEMs, but XRF is more bulk sensitive than EDS. EDS in SEMs generally use electron beam sources with small spot sizes (a couple nm in diameter), which then generates an interaction volume 1-2 microns in diameter where characteristic X-rays are emitted. XRF, however, will conduct the reading over a much larger &amp;quot;spot&amp;quot; area, with X-rays penetrating anywhere from several μm to a few mm in depth. This depth depends on the sample itself and the energy of the X-rays used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Data ===&lt;br /&gt;
XRF data is presented as an intensity against energy (eV or keV) plot, where peak location (energy) determines the characteristic emission line represented, and relative peak heights (intensity) determines the a compositional ratio. Known electron binding energies and emission lines can be found in the X-ray data booklet, found [https://xdb.lbl.gov here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Theory==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[X-ray Notation]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Equipment|char]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=X-ray_Diffraction&amp;diff=39215</id>
		<title>X-ray Diffraction</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=X-ray_Diffraction&amp;diff=39215"/>
		<updated>2021-10-06T02:59:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; | ARL Equinox 100 XRD [https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/sop/xrd/ [SOP&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:XRD-052621.png|center|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;2\theta&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; Range&#039;&#039;&#039;: 0&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;^\circ&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; to 110&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;^{\circ}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Source&#039;&#039;&#039;: Cu Kα, λ = 1.5406Å&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Sample Type&#039;&#039;&#039;: Powders&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;X-ray diffractometry (XRD)&#039;&#039;&#039; detects crystalline phases in a sample by measuring the diffraction pattern of X-rays at varying angles. X-rays are used because the interplanar spacing for the vast majority of crystalline materials falls in the range of X-ray wavelengths (0.01-10 nm). The MILL’s XRD is set up for powder X-ray diffraction: for the best results, samples should be ground into a fine powder so that the collective group of crystals has a random orientation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Operation ==&lt;br /&gt;
Anyone who wishes to use or be trained on the XRD must undergo the general lab safety training &#039;&#039;&#039;AND&#039;&#039;&#039; the Georgia Tech Office of Radiological Safety (ORS) X-Ray Safety Training before reporting to the XRD Technical Officer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Theory ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bragg_xrd.png|thumb|400px|Constructive interference of scattered X-rays in a BCC structure. The phase shifts differ by a factor of half the interplanar spacing distance.]]&lt;br /&gt;
XRDs use an X-ray source to generate a beam of X-rays that are reflected off crystalline planes in the sample material. A detector, which typically rotates around the sample, captures a set of reflected X-rays corresponding to different planar orientations. When each plane of atoms reflects the incident beam, the reflected wave has a specific sinusoidal offset, or phase shift. The reflected X-rays from all planes form a &#039;&#039;&#039;diffraction pattern&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At certain angles, planes may reflect waves with phase shifts separated by the wavelength of the incident X-ray. These reflected X-rays align and recombine into a more intense X-ray, a phenomenon known as &#039;&#039;&#039;constructive interference&#039;&#039;&#039;. Otherwise, the electromagnetic waves instead cancel each other out, undergoing &#039;&#039;&#039;destructive interference&#039;&#039;&#039;. We can measure the diffraction intensity at each angle to determine the orientation of crystals in the sample. Because crystalline materials typically contain equally separated planes, we can also use the intensity data to calculate the separation between two planes of atoms. This allows us to calculate the lattice parameter, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;a&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, for virtually any crystalline structure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bragg&#039;s Law ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:NaCl_xrd.png|thumb|400px|Powder X-ray diffraction data from polycrystalline NaCl, using a detector range from 0&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;^\circ&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; to 60&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;^\circ&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;.]]&lt;br /&gt;
Given a constant interplanar spacing &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, angle of reflection &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\theta&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, X-ray wavelength &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lambda&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, and any positive integer &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;n&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, we can express Bragg&#039;s Law, the fundamental equation of diffraction. As seen in Figure 3, the sine of the angle of reflection represents the number of wavelengths in the corresponding phase shift over the interplanar atomic spacing.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\sin(\theta) = (\frac{n\lambda}{2d})&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Or more commonly:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;2d\sin(\theta) = n\lambda&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a family of planes corresponding to the Miller indices &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\{h,k,l\}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, denote the normal vector to that plane as:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;{\bf\vec{N}} = \langle h, k, l \rangle&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Vert{\bf\vec{N}}\Vert = \sqrt{h^2 + k^2 + l^2}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that in a cubic crystal: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;d = \frac{a}{\Vert{\bf\vec{N}}\Vert}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a given crystal, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\frac{\lambda}{2a}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is constant. Therefore:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\sin(\theta) = \Vert{\bf\vec{N}}\Vert(\frac{\lambda}{2a})&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\frac{\sin(\theta_1)}{\sin(\theta_2)} = \frac{\Vert{\bf\vec{N_1}}\Vert}{\Vert{\bf\vec{N_2}}\Vert}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This relation between reflection angle and the Miller indices allows us to determine crystal structures from an XRD plot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Data ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the angle of reflection is theta, the angle between the incident and reflected waves is &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;2\theta&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. In the plot, we represent the range of angles as &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;2\theta&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, on the x-axis, while detection intensity is measured on the y-axis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a specific family of planes, there are distinct diffraction patterns—there are two important rules which allow us to use peak data to determine if a material is BCC or FCC. For BCC structures, the sum of the Miller indices, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;h + k + l&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, must be even for diffraction to occur on the &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\{h,k,l\}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; family of planes. For the FCC structure, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\{h,k,l\}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; must all have the same parity (all even or all odd).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Theory==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Scanning Electron Microscope (SEM)#EBSD|Electron backscatter diffraction (EBSD)]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Equipment|char]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Infrared_Spectroscopy&amp;diff=39214</id>
		<title>Infrared Spectroscopy</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Infrared_Spectroscopy&amp;diff=39214"/>
		<updated>2021-10-06T02:58:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{|class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; | Nicolet FTIR [https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/sop/ftir/ [SOP&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:FTIR-052621.png|center|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;IR Activity&#039;&#039;&#039;: Bonds must have dipoles&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Sample Type&#039;&#039;&#039;: Solids (bulk, powder, fiber, film), Liquids (solution, paste, gel), Gas (transmission only, needs proper cell)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Detector&#039;&#039;&#039;: DTGS (deuterated triglycine sulfate)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Accessories&#039;&#039;&#039;: iD7 ATR (attenuated total reflectance), iD1 Transmission&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fourier Transform Infrared Spectroscopy uses infrared radiation to determine the chemical bonds present in the sample. A spectrum of wavenumber and absorbance can be analyzed for the chemical composition of a sample. Organic molecules are most readily identified, making the FTIR an ideal tool for polymer identification and characterization.  In addition to a standard transmission attachment, an attenuated total reflectance head allows for direct testing of solids and liquids without any sample preparation.  The OMNIC software connected to the spectrometer allows for single and multi-component identification of the molecules and polymers in a sample by comparing the spectra gathered to stored libraries of data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Principle ==&lt;br /&gt;
The normal instrumental process is as follows:&amp;lt;ref Name=&amp;quot;FTIR&amp;quot;&amp;gt; Thermo Scientific. (n.d.). Introduction to FTIR. http://tools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/brochures/BR50555_E_0513M_H_1.pdf. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The Source: Infrared energy is emitted from a glowing black-body source. This beam passes through an aperture which controls the amount of energy presented to the sample (and, ultimately, to the detector).&lt;br /&gt;
# The Interferometer: The beam enters the interferometer where the “spectral encoding” takes place. The resulting interferogram signal then exits the interferometer. The interferometer uses a reference laser for precise wavelength calibration, mirror position control and data acquisition timing.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Sample: The beam enters the sample compartment where it is transmitted through or reflected off of the surface of the sample, depending on the type of analysis being accomplished. This is where specific frequencies of energy, which are uniquely characteristic of the sample, are absorbed.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Detector: The beam finally passes to the detector for final measurement. The detectors used are specially designed to measure the special interferogram signal.[[File:FTIRSetup.PNG|thumb|left|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
# The Computer: The measured signal is digitized and sent to the computer where the Fourier transformation takes place. The final infrared spectrum is then presented to the user for interpretation and any further manipulation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because there needs to be a relative scale for the absorption intensity, a background spectrum must also be measured. This is normally a measurement with no sample in the beam. This can be compared to the measurement with the sample in the beam to determine the “percent transmittance.” This technique results in a spectrum which has all of the instrumental characteristics removed. Thus, all spectral features which are present are strictly due to the sample. A single background measurement can be used for many sample measurements because this spectrum is characteristic of the instrument itself&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Applications ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:FtirbasicsreferencechartPRINT.jpg|thumb|left|500px|A reference chart with some of the most common peaks seen in FTIR &amp;lt;ref Name&amp;quot;FTIR chart&amp;quot;&amp;gt; Bradley, M., says, B. B., &amp;amp;amp; says, R. katole. (2021, June 11). Free FTIR Basic Organic Functional Group Reference Chart. Advancing Materials. https://www.thermofisher.com/blog/materials/a-gift-for-you-an-ftir-basic-organic-functional-group-reference-chart/. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;]]Infrared spectroscopy has been a workhorse technique for materials analysis in the laboratory for over seventy years. An infrared spectrum represents a fingerprint of a sample with absorption peaks which correspond to the frequencies of vibrations between the bonds of the atoms making up the material. Because each different material is a unique combination of atoms, no two compounds produce the exact same infrared spectrum. Therefore, infrared spectroscopy can result in a positive identification (qualitative analysis) of every different kind of material. In addition, the size of the peaks in the spectrum is a direct indication of the amount of material present. With modern software algorithms, infrared is an excellent tool for quantitative analysis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dispersive vs Fourier Transform IR ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:FTIRLayout.PNG|thumb|Simplified layout of a FTIR spectrometer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The original infrared instruments were of the dispersive type. These instruments separated the individual frequencies of energy emitted from the infrared source. This was accomplished by the use of a prism or grating. An infrared prism works exactly the same as a visible prism which separates visible light into its colors (frequencies). A grating is a more modern dispersive element which better separates the frequencies of infrared energy. The detector measures the amount of energy at each frequency which has passed through the sample, resulting in a spectrum which is a plot of intensity vs. frequency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fourier transform infrared (FTIR) spectrometry was developed in order to overcome the limitations encountered with dispersive instruments. The main difficulty was the slow scanning process. A method for measuring all of the infrared frequencies simultaneously, rather than individually, was needed. A solution was developed which employed a very simple optical device called an interferometer. The interferometer produces a unique type of signal which has all of the infrared frequencies “encoded” into it. The signal can be measured very quickly, usually on the order of one second or so. Thus, the time element per sample is reduced to a matter of a few seconds rather than several minutes. Most interferometers employ a beamsplitter which takes the incoming infrared beam and divides it into two optical beams. One beam reflects off of a flat mirror which is fixed in place. The other beam reflects off of a flat mirror which is on a mechanism which allows this mirror to move a very short distance (typically a few millimeters) away from the beam splitter. The two beams reflect off of their respective mirrors and are recombined when they meet back at the beamsplitter. Because the path that one beam travels is a fixed length and the other is constantly changing as its mirror moves, the signal which exits the interferometer is the result of these two beams “interfering” with each other. The resulting signal is called an interferogram which has the unique property that every data point (a function of the moving mirror position) which makes up the signal has information about every infrared frequency which comes from the source. This means that as the interferogram is measured, all frequencies are being measured simultaneously. Thus, the use of the interferometer results in extremely fast measurements. Because the analyst requires a frequency spectrum (a plot of the intensity at each individual frequency) in order to make an identification, the measured interferogram signal can not be interpreted directly. A means of “decoding” the individual frequencies is required. This can be accomplished via a well-known mathematical technique called the Fourier transformation. This transformation is performed by the computer which then presents the user with the desired spectral information for analysis.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:FT.PNG|thumb|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Advantages of FT vs. Dispersive IR ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Non-destructive technique&lt;br /&gt;
* Provides a precise measurement method which requires no external calibration&lt;br /&gt;
* Can increase speed, collecting a scan every second&lt;br /&gt;
* Can increase sensitivity – one second scans can be co-added together to ratio out random noise&lt;br /&gt;
* Greater optical throughput&lt;br /&gt;
* Mechanically simple with only one moving part&lt;br /&gt;
== References == &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Equipment|char]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Optical_Profilometry&amp;diff=39213</id>
		<title>Optical Profilometry</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Optical_Profilometry&amp;diff=39213"/>
		<updated>2021-10-06T02:58:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{|class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; | Profilm 3D Optical Profilometer [https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/sop/profilometer/ [SOP&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Profilometer-052621.png|center|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Objectives&#039;&#039;&#039;: 10x, 20x, 50x&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field of View&#039;&#039;&#039;: 2.0 x 1.7 mm (10x), 1.0 x 0.85 mm (20x), 0.4 x 0.34 mm (50x)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Surface Roughness Resolution&#039;&#039;&#039;: 0.05μm&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Stage XY range&#039;&#039;&#039;: 100 mm x 100 mm&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Z range&#039;&#039;&#039;: 100 mm&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Camera&#039;&#039;&#039;: 2592 x 1944 (5 megapixels)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Profilm 3D optical profilometer uses white light interferometry to measure surface profiles and roughness. It has 10x, 20x, and 50x objectives that can resolve surface roughness down to 0.05 μm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
Profilometry is a technique used to extract topographical data from a surface. &amp;lt;ref Name=&amp;quot;Nanoscience&amp;quot;&amp;gt; Optical Profilometry. Nanoscience Instruments. (2018, July 26). https://www.nanoscience.com/techniques/optical-profilometry/. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; This can be a single point, a line scan or even a full three dimensional scan. The purpose of profilometry is to get surface morphology, step heights and surface roughness. This can be done using a physical probe or by using light. Metrology is the science of measurement. How rough is the sample? How high are the features? How much of the area has voids or particles? What is the defect density? Answers to these questions are often quantified using profilometry. All profilometers consist of at least two parts – a detector and a sample stage. The detector is what determines where the points on the sample are and the sample stage is what holds the sample. In some systems, the sample stage moves to allow for measurement while in others the detector moves. There are also instruments where both the sample stage and detector move.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Principle ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SPdiagram.PNG|thumb|left|500px|Schematic of a stylus profilometer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Stylus Profilometry ===&lt;br /&gt;
Stylus profilometers use a probe to detect the surface, physically moving a probe along the surface in order to acquire the surface height. This is done mechanically with a feedback loop that monitors the force from the sample pushing up against the probe as it scans along the surface. A feedback system is used to keep the arm with a specific amount of torque on it, known as the ‘setpoint’. The changes in the Z position of the arm holder can then be used to reconstruct the surface. Stylus profilometry requires force feedback and physically touching the surface, so while it is extremely sensitive and provides high Z resolution, it is sensitive to soft surfaces and the probe can become contaminated by the surface. This technique can also be destructive to some surfaces. Because a stylus profilometer involves physical movements in X, Y and Z while maintaining contact with the surface, it is slower than non-contact techniques. The stylus tip size and shape can influence the measurements and limit the lateral resolution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Optical Profilometry ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OPdiagram.PNG|thumb|left|400px|Schematic of an interferometric profilometer]]&lt;br /&gt;
Optical profilometry uses light instead of a physical probe. This can be done a number of ways. The key component to this technique is directing the light in a way that it can detect the surface in 3D. Examples include optical interference, using a confocal aperture, focus and phase detection, and projecting a pattern onto the optical image.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== White Light Interferometry ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:WLI2.PNG|thumb|500px|Illustration of interference pattern on a sloped sample]]Light interference occurs when there is a difference in distance traveled by the light (light path) from the surface of a target object to a certain point; a white light interferometer uses this phenomenon to measure the surface roughness of a sample &amp;lt;ref Name=&amp;quot;Keyence&amp;quot;&amp;gt; White Light Interferometers. White Light Interferometers | Instruments Used For Roughness Measurements | Introduction To Roughness | KEYENCE America. (n.d.). https://www.keyence.com/ss/products/microscope/roughness/equipment/interferometers.jsp.  &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;. The light emitted from the source (semiconductor laser, etc.) is separated into reference and measurement beams. While the reference beam is passed through the reference mirror through a half mirror, the measurement beam is reflected and guided to the sample surface. The passed beam is reflected by the reference mirror to the charge-coupled device (CCD) image sensor and forms an interference pattern. The other beam is reflected off the sample surface, passes the half mirror, and forms an image through the CCD image sensor.  The white light interferometer is designed so that the optical path length from the CCD element to the reference mirror and that from the CCD element to the sample surface are the same. The asperity on the sample surface causes these path lengths to be unequal, which results in forming an interference pattern at the CCD element. The number of lines in the interference pattern is translated to peaks and troughs (heights) on the sample surface.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Advantages ===&lt;br /&gt;
* Capable of measuring a wide field of view: Measurement in sub-nanometer range is possible.&lt;br /&gt;
* Quick measurement: Approximately 20 seconds compared to much longer for a stylus profilometer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Disadvantages ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* No or limited angular characteristic&lt;br /&gt;
* Use is limited on certain objects: White light interferometers can only measure when there is a good reflection. There, it does not support measurement capabilities on a wide variety of objects. Measurements may also not be possible when there is a significant difference between the light reflected from the reference mirror and light reflected from the measurement area. (White light interferometers handle mirrored surfaces well, but cannot measure spiky or bumpy samples or nonreflective parts.&lt;br /&gt;
* Requires tilt correction: Prior to measuring, sample tilt correction must be performed using a goniometric stage. Tilted samples can cause closely-spaced interference patters, which hinder measurement accuracy. Some white light interferometry systems are equipped with a tilt mechanism that automatically corrects the sample tilt.&lt;br /&gt;
* Low resolution for XY stage measurements: The resolution for XY stage measurements are low due to the low number of sampling data sets (approximately 300,000). Some white light interferometry systems can scale up to use approximately 980,000 data sets.&lt;br /&gt;
* Sensitive to vibrations: Place of installation is limited due to the equipment’s high sensitivity to vibrations. Shock-absorbing tables are necessary for installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References == &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Equipment|char]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Optical_Microscopy&amp;diff=39212</id>
		<title>Optical Microscopy</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Optical_Microscopy&amp;diff=39212"/>
		<updated>2021-10-06T02:56:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Page-under-construction.png|400px|thumb|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
{|class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot;| Leica DVM6 Digital Microscope [https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/sop/digital-microscope/ [SOP&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:LeicaOptical-052621.png|center|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Objectives&#039;&#039;&#039; (diagonal FOV, in mm):&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&#039;&#039;&#039;- PlanAPO FOV 12.55&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;- Max. magnification: 675x&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;- Max. resolution: 1073 lp/mm (0.93 μm)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;- Working distance (WD): 33 mm&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&#039;&#039;&#039;- PlanAPO FOV 3.60&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;- Max. magnification: 2350x&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;- Max. resolution: 2366 lp/mm (0.42 μm)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;- WD: 5 mm&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Lens tilt range&#039;&#039;&#039;: ±60°&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Stage XY range&#039;&#039;&#039;: 70 mm x 50 mm&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Stage rotation range&#039;&#039;&#039;: ±180°&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Stage max load&#039;&#039;&#039;: 2 kg&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Illumination sources&#039;&#039;&#039;: 4-quadrant ring light, coaxial light&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Capabilities&#039;&#039;&#039;: XY Image stitching, Z-stack stitching&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PAGE UNDER CONSTRUCTION&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; | AmScope Optical Stereomicroscope [https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/sop/stereomicroscope/ [SOP&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; | Leica DMi8-M Inverted Microscope [https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/sop/inverted-microscope/ [SOP&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;||[[File:StereoOptical-052621.png|center|300px]]||[[File:InvertedMicroscope-062621.png|center|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Camera&#039;&#039;&#039;:||DCM300||Leica DMC2900&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Equipment|char]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Plasma_Sputtering&amp;diff=39211</id>
		<title>Plasma Sputtering</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Plasma_Sputtering&amp;diff=39211"/>
		<updated>2021-10-06T02:55:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Page-under-construction.png|400px|thumb|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
{|class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; | Cressington 108 Sputter Coater [https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/sop/sputter-coater/ [SOP&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:SputterCoater-052621.png|center|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Available Targets&#039;&#039;&#039;: Gold&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A simple and easy-to-use sputter coater for making samples surface’s more conductive for SEM imagery. A vacuum pump is attached to the sputter coater to achieve vacuum conditions and argon is used as the inert chamber gas. A full calibration has not yet been done on the sputter coater, but the thickness of samples is often changed by varying the time of the sputter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Equipment|char]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Scanning_Electron_Microscopy&amp;diff=39210</id>
		<title>Scanning Electron Microscopy</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Scanning_Electron_Microscopy&amp;diff=39210"/>
		<updated>2021-10-06T02:53:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{| class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!|&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; |PhenomXL SEM [[https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/sop/phenomxl-sem/ SOP]]&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; |Phenom ProX SEM [[https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/sop/phenomprox-sem/ SOP]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;||[[File:PhenomXL.png|center|250px]]||[[File:PhenomProX.png|center|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Magnification Range&#039;&#039;&#039;:||160x to 200,000x||80x to 130,000x&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Accelerating Voltages&#039;&#039;&#039;:|| 4.8 kV to 20.5 kV (advanced mode)|| 5, 10, or 15 kV ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Feature Resolution&#039;&#039;&#039;:|| ~10nm || ~14nm&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Detectors&#039;&#039;&#039;:||Secondary (SED) &amp;amp; Backscatter (BSD)||Backscatter only&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Capabilities&#039;&#039;&#039;:|| EDS, AIM, 3DRR || EDS&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Sample Dimensions&#039;&#039;&#039;:|| max. 10 cm x 10 cm, 4 cm (h); or 36 stubs || max. 3.2 cm (ø), 3 cm (h)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Scanning electron microscopy (SEM) rasters an electron beam across a specific area on a sample, allowing for much higher magnifications compared to optical microscopy. The electrons are either elastically or inelastically reflected off the sample, then captured by detector(s) to yield an image.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Electron Microscopy ==&lt;br /&gt;
Electron and optical microscopy share many fundamental components—specifically, a lens used to focus a specific type of source, and after either reflecting from or transmitting through the sample, a “signal” is then captured by a detector which processes inputs and spits out an image. In optical microscopy, an optical glass lens focuses photons from a lamp into either a digital camera or your eye. In electron microscopy, a series of variable magnetic fields serve as condenser lenses to vary the current and spot size of the electron beam (e-beam) generated from an electron gun. In SEM, this beam is then focused using an electromagnetic objective lens and rastered across the sample by a set of scan coils.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Similar to optical microscopy, electron microscopy also has both reflection and transmission modes—these are two separate imaging techniques known as &#039;&#039;&#039;Scanning Electron Microscopy (SEM)&#039;&#039;&#039; and  &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM)]]&#039;&#039;&#039;, respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Types of Electron Guns ===&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 main types of electron guns used in electron microscopy: thermionic (Schottky) emission and cold field emission. Both types required an electron source—typically this is either a single crystal of tungsten, lanthanum hexaboride (LaB&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;6&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;), or cerium hexaboride (CeB&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;6&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;). Both Phenom SEMs at the MILL use thermionic emission guns with a CeB&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;6&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; source.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Software Features ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Automated Image Mapping (AIM)&#039;&#039;&#039;: SEMs will raster beam over a larger area of a sample at a given magnification and automatically stitch the caputured images together.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;3D Roughness Reconstruction (3DRR)&#039;&#039;&#039;: SEM will attempt to focus in a range of depths, then stitch together planes of features which are in focus to generate a 3D image representative of surface topology. This can be exported as an image or .stl file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Magnification &amp;amp; Resolution ==&lt;br /&gt;
SEMs can provide an additional 2 orders of magnitude in magnification and resolution when compared to optical microscopes, which typically max out around 1,000x magnification and 200 nm resolution. SEMs typically have around 100,000x magnification and 2 nm resolution. This additional resolution is governed by the Abbe equation and de Broglie wave equation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Proof ===&lt;br /&gt;
Abbe’s equation defines the theoretical maximum resolution of a microscope, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\delta&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; as:&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\delta=\frac{k\lambda}{n\sin(\alpha)}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;k = 0.61&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is an empirical constant, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;n&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is the refractive index, and  &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\alpha&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is the aperture half-angle. The term in the denominator, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;n\sin{\alpha)}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, is also known as the &#039;&#039;numerical aperture&#039;&#039;, or nA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In optical microscopy, Abbe’s equation simplifies to &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\delta=\frac{0.61\lambda}{nA}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, where the numerical aperture at high magnifications typically levels out at &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;nA \approx 1.35&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. Plugging in the &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lambda&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; for green light gives:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\delta=\frac{0.61\cdot500\textrm{nm}}{1.35}=226\textnormal{nm}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In electron microscopy, the refractive index is typically 1, since the chamber is pumped down to near-vacuum conditions, and the aperture half-angle is typically very small. Using the [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Small-angle_approximation small-angle approximation], we can simplify Abbe’s equation to &lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\delta=\frac{0.61\lambda}{\alpha}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since electron microscopy uses an electron beam to image the sample, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lambda&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is now the de Broglie wavelength of an electron. The de Broglie wave equation states:&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lambda=\frac{h}{p}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;h&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is Planck’s constant and &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;p&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is momentum. Recall that kinetic energy is defined as:&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\textrm{KE} = \frac{1}{2}mv^2&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\therefore p=mv=\sqrt{2m(\textrm{KE})}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Electron microscopes such as SEMs typically have a controllable accelerating voltage—this term affects the kinetic energy of the e-beam by the fundamental relation: &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\textrm{KE} = e\textrm{V}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;e&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is the elementary charge. Plugging in for momentum and kinetic energy, we get:&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\therefore \lambda=\frac{h}{\sqrt{2me\textrm{V}}}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, by plugging in all constants and assuming a small aperture half-angle of 0.01 rad (must use radians for small-angle approximation), the following resolutions can be obtained for varying accelerating voltages. Note that these calculations use Newtonian equations, not Einsteinian (relativistic) equations.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Accelerating Voltage (kV) !! de Broglie Wavelength (nm) !! Abbe Resolution (nm)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 5 || .0173 || 1.06&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 10 || .0123 || .751&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 15 || .0100 || .613&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 100 || .00388 pm || .237&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Limitations ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ElectronInteractionVolume.png|thumb|350px|right|Electron Interaction Volume with Matter (note: backscattered electrons should be abbreviated as BSE)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;© User:Claudionico / Wikimedia Commons / CC-BY-SA-4.0]]&lt;br /&gt;
Despite the near-atomic resolution claimed by Abbe’s equation at higher accelerating voltages, SEMs struggle to reach beyond nanometer-level resolution, and therefore cannot see individual atoms. There are many variables which cause the reduction in practical resolution, so only major factors are listed here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Interaction Volume===&lt;br /&gt;
The first limitation is electron interaction volume. When a high energy electron beam strikes the sample, electrons penetrate the sample and knock free other electrons, ballooning into a relatively large interaction volume. The greater the accelerating voltage, the greater the interaction volume—therefore, SEMs must balance the improvement in theoretical Abbe resolution from a higher energy and the decrease in resolution from larger interaction volumes at high accelerating voltages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Interaction volume typically has a diameter in the micron range for bulk samples and a diameter in the same order as sample thickness for thin foils used in TEM. This tiny interaction volume is also why extremely thin (&amp;lt;50nm) TEM foils can get down to atomic resolution. For SEM samples, noise and overlapping signals from different areas of a sample will blur an image if the accelerating voltage and interaction volume are too large. Ideally, interaction volume diameter should approximate the size of sample features to get sharp images.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Aberrations ===&lt;br /&gt;
Aberrations occur when a lens fails to converge all rays at a single point and the image becomes out of focus. There are two types of aberrations: spherical and chromatic. In SEM, spherical aberrations occur when electrons near the edges of an electromagnetic lens are bent inconsistently compared to electrons at the center of the lens and fail to converge—this can be fixed by using a smaller aperture. Chromatic aberrations occur when the electron beam is not of uniform energy, causing the electromagnetic lens to bend electrons of differing energies to different points on the focal plane. Both of these phenomena derive their names from the same photon-based effects in optical microscopy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Astigmatism===&lt;br /&gt;
Astigmatism in SEM occurs due to fluctuations in magnetic field strength, which may be caused by defects in the electron column core, source contamination, or magnetic samples. This typically results in the blurring or stretching of the SEM image, and can be corrected using stigmation coils. Most SEMs have both an X and Y stigmator knobs for correcting stretching, as well as an auto-stigmation feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Information Provided by SEM Emissions==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SEM-EmissionMechanisms.png|350px|thumb|right|SE, BSE, and characteristic X-ray Emissions&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;© Rob Hurt / Wikimedia Commons / CC-BY-SA-4.0]]&lt;br /&gt;
When primary electrons (PE) from the e-beam inelastically interact with electrons in the sample, they transfer a significant portion of their kinetic energy to another electron, which is then ejected as a secondary electron (SE). Other times, primary electrons can &amp;quot;slingshot&amp;quot; around atomic nuclei and return while only losing a negligible amount of energy. This is an elastic interaction, and the returned primary electrons are redubbed backscattered electrons (BSD). While SE have energies in the 10s of eVs, BSE return with the same initial energy, which varies based on accelerating voltage (10 kV accelerating voltage &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Rightarrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; 10 keV of energy). Therefore, SEMs primarily handle 2 detectors used for imaging: these are the secondary electron detector (SED) and the backscattered electron detector (BSD).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SED ===&lt;br /&gt;
Secondary electrons give an image which shows &#039;&#039;&#039;topographical&#039;&#039;&#039; features and a relatively large [[#Depth of Field|depth of field]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since SEs have such low energies, they can only escape when present in the sample&#039;s surface (the top several nm). This also means SEs have low interaction volume, and have resolutions on the nm level. The most common type of SED is the Everhart-Thornley (ET) detector, which are placed off-center from the sample to provide better contrast between SEs coming from different areas on the sample surface in exchange for slightly worse signal-to-noise ratio. The reasoning for sacrificing signal is because SE yields (# of emitted SEs per PE) are over 100%&amp;amp;mdash;this is because high-energy PEs undergoing inelastic interactions can dislodge multiple SEs at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== BSD ===&lt;br /&gt;
Backscattered electrons give elemental contrast (Z-contrast), but by using a 4-quadrant detector, some topographical features are also resolvable. Turning off half of a 4-quadrant BSD works similarly to ET SEDs, where one side of sample will appear brighter than the other side. Note that these topographical modes do lose some Z-contrast in the process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
BSEs are very high energy, and therefore penetrate deeper into the sample than SEs. This larger interaction volume results in BSD resolutions in the 100s of nm, 2 orders of magnitude worse than SEDs. Additionally, BSE yields are typically under 50% because they cannot &amp;quot;share&amp;quot; their initial energy and some BSEs become trapped in atomic orbitals. Z-contrast occurs because of increasing nucleus size through the periodic table&amp;amp;mdash;heavier nuclei will more effectively &amp;quot;slingshot&amp;quot; PEs, result in greater counts for heavier atoms and lower counts for lighter atoms. This is typically displayed by making atomically heavier areas of the sample bright and atomically lighter areas of the sample dark.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== EDS ===&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, inelastic interactions which dislodge secondary electrons leave an electron vacancy which must be quenched, similar to &#039;&#039;&#039;[[X-ray Fluorescence Spectrometer (XRF) | X-ray fluorescence spectroscopy (XRF)]]&#039;&#039;&#039;. The resulting vacancy is quenched, and the surplus energy is ejected as a secondary characteristic X-ray. Since energy drops between electrons levels in a given atom are discrete and distinct, a detector which can catch these secondary X-rays would be able to determine elemental composition. This is known as energy-dispersive X-ray spectroscopy (EDS/EDX), as is very common in SEM systems. Unlike XRF, secondary X-rays are only emitted from a small spot&amp;amp;mdash;more specifically, it is sensitive to interaction volume, which is typically 1-2 μm in diameter for characteristic X-rays, with a spot size of a few nm. For comparison XRF depth ranges from several μm to a few mm, and irradiates the entire sample at once. This makes EDS &#039;&#039;slightly&#039;&#039; more surface sensitive, while XRF is more bulk sensitive. In SEM, rastering the e-beam source across the sample generates an EDS map, which is useful to measue elemental composition of specific surface features such as pores and inclusions, as well as compositional differeneces across grain boundaries.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== EBSD ===&lt;br /&gt;
Electron backscatter diffraction (EBSD) is a characterization technique found in some SEMs which gives detailed crystollographic information typically only available from techniques such as TEM or XRD. EBSD requires a crystalline sample polished to a flat surface to improve the signal-to-noise ratio of diffraction bands and lattice quality. The sample must also be highly tilted (~70º from horizontal) with respect to the diffraction camera (placed perpendicular to the e-beam) to increase diffraction contrast for the camera&#039;s phosphor screen, and the sample must be placed extremely close to the camera to increase signal (low working distance, WD &amp;lt; 5mm for most SEMs). The backscattered electrons which escape at this specific angle must follow the [[X-ray Diffractometer (XRD)#Bragg&#039;s Law|Bragg diffraction condition]], resulting signal bands seen on the camera known as &#039;&#039;Kikuchi lines&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;Kikuchi bands&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DOF-diagram.png|300px|thumb|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
==Depth of Field==&lt;br /&gt;
Electron microscopy, specifically when detecting secondary electrons, has a superior depth of field compared to optical microscopy. Depth of field is a objective measure of the ability of a microscope to simultaneously focus at multiple depth&amp;amp;mdash;more specifically, it is the &amp;quot;acceptable range&amp;quot; of depths where sample features are still in focus. Mathematically, depth of field, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;D&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, can be approximated by:&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;D=\frac{2r}{\tan{\alpha}}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;r&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is the radius of the viewing spot, and &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\alpha&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is again the aperture half-angle. This formula can be confirmed upon inspection of the diagram to the right. This small aperture half-angle is what gives SEMs a much better depth of field that optical microscopes, whose aperture half angles are much larger. For SEMs, we can once again use the small-angle approximation to simplify this to:&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;D=\frac{2r}{\alpha}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Since depth of field is subjective and based on the image itself, note that this viewing spot is actually the defined by the area on the sample which corresponds to a single pixel of the image. This area can therefore be calculated using the SEM&#039;s field of view, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;W_\textrm{FOV}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, and the pixel width of the image, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;W_\textrm{pix}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;2r=\frac{W_\textrm{FOV}}{W_\textrm{pix}}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, if given the image&#039;s actual pixel size (a constant diameter), &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;P&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, we can define magnification, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;M&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, to be:&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;M=\frac{P}{2r} \rightarrow 2r=\frac{P}{M}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This shows that the size of the viewing spot depends on image magnification: therefore, magnification also affects the depth of field.&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\therefore D=\frac{P}{M\alpha}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From this equation, we can see that lowering either the aperture half-angle or the magnification will result in a greater depth of field in SEMs. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Working Distance===&lt;br /&gt;
Since magnification cannot be changed if we want to continue to view small features, the aperture can be tweaked through the working distance, or WD. WD is the distance between the bottom pole piece of the objective lens and the specimen. Given the objective aperture radius &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;R&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\alpha&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; can be defined as:&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\alpha=\frac{R}{\textrm{WD}}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
WD typically falls between 5-9 mm when using secondary electron detectors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Common SEM Issues==&lt;br /&gt;
SEMs run into several unavoidable issues which requires users to prepare and analyze samples more carefully.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Sample Charging===&lt;br /&gt;
Since SEMs blast a sample with electrons, samples will always charge wil imaging. The polarity of charge depends on the sample, but typically the sample emits more electrons than the number of incident primary electrons due to a SE yield of over 100%. Therefore, the sample becomes slightly positively charged. A charged sample results in several complications for SEM, whether positively or negatively charged. Charged samples will deflect both the primary e-beam at the surface and the emitted electrons. This disturbs focus, depth of field, and contrast, distorts and drifts the image, creates random dark and bright spots/streaks on the image, and in extreme cases, charging can even break parts of the specimen and damage the detector and source.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To avoid this, several precautions can be taken during sample prep and during analysis. Firstly, either carbon or copper tape should be used to afix the sample to the sample stub or holder so that the sample is grounded. This allows electrons to freely travel to fill electron-holes in the sample to maintain a neutral charge. Non-conductive samples should be coated with gold nanoparticles (see [[Sputter Coater]]) to make the sample conductive&amp;amp;mdash;this allows topographical features to still be visible, although it will dampen contrast in BSD images and muddle EDS with gold peaks. If BSD or EDS are wanted, the sample should instead be imaged at a low accelerating voltage on the SEM (5kV) and rastering speed should be increased to avoid significant charging at any one spot. Conductive samples simply need to be grounded to the sample stub or holder. For samples mounted in a hot mounting press, use a conductive mounting compound (such as conductive phenolic powders) or afix carbon or copper tape directly onto the sample surface and ground point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Sample Etching===&lt;br /&gt;
When a higher energy e-beam rasters across one region for a prolonged duration, it may &amp;quot;etch&amp;quot; the sample by depositing a thin layer of residue. This residue comes from gases which were not pumped out by the vacuum, namely, hydrocarbons and water. High energy electrons can help water and carbon &amp;quot;stick&amp;quot; ot the sample, and upon increasing your field of view in the imaging software, a darkened box may be visible on your sample—this is a sign of etching. This phenomena is especially prevalent at higher magnifications, where the beam continually rasters over an even smaller spot. This is unpreventable, but during analysis, it is recommended to not stay in one place for a long time and to keep moving around. When examining small features that require high magnification, focus on another small feature in the same plane as your feature, then move to your area of interest to avoid etching imporant areas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;quot;Dangerous&amp;quot; Samples===&lt;br /&gt;
Any sample with loose particles may break under an intense e-beam and damage the detector and source&amp;amp;mdash;samples must be firmly attached to the sample stub or holder. Because lenses in electron microscopes are controlled using precise electromagnetic fields, magnetic samples may permamently damage the objective lens and are therefore not allowed in many SEMs. Porous samples suck as rock and concrete may contain trapped gases which may degas if put under high vacuum in the SEM. These gases may damage the detector and source, so samples should be degassed (and dried) before analysis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Theory &amp;amp; Techniques==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Sputter Coater]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Optical Microscopy]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM)]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[X-ray Fluorescence Spectrometer (XRF)]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[X-ray Diffractometer (XRD)]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[X-ray Notation]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Equipment|char]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Scanning_Electron_Microscopy&amp;diff=39209</id>
		<title>Scanning Electron Microscopy</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Scanning_Electron_Microscopy&amp;diff=39209"/>
		<updated>2021-10-06T02:48:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{| class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!|[https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/sop/phenomxl-sem/ SOP]&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; |PhenomXL SEM&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; |Phenom ProX SEM&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;||[[File:PhenomXL.png|center|250px]]||[[File:PhenomProX.png|center|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Magnification Range&#039;&#039;&#039;:||160x to 200,000x||80x to 130,000x&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Accelerating Voltages&#039;&#039;&#039;:|| 4.8 kV to 20.5 kV (advanced mode)|| 5, 10, or 15 kV ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Feature Resolution&#039;&#039;&#039;:|| ~10nm || ~14nm&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Detectors&#039;&#039;&#039;:||Secondary (SED) &amp;amp; Backscatter (BSD)||Backscatter only&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Capabilities&#039;&#039;&#039;:|| EDS, AIM, 3DRR || EDS&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Sample Dimensions&#039;&#039;&#039;:|| max. 10 cm x 10 cm, 4 cm (h); or 36 stubs || max. 3.2 cm (ø), 3 cm (h)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Scanning electron microscopy (SEM) rasters an electron beam across a specific area on a sample, allowing for much higher magnifications compared to optical microscopy. The electrons are either elastically or inelastically reflected off the sample, then captured by detector(s) to yield an image.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Electron Microscopy ==&lt;br /&gt;
Electron and optical microscopy share many fundamental components—specifically, a lens used to focus a specific type of source, and after either reflecting from or transmitting through the sample, a “signal” is then captured by a detector which processes inputs and spits out an image. In optical microscopy, an optical glass lens focuses photons from a lamp into either a digital camera or your eye. In electron microscopy, a series of variable magnetic fields serve as condenser lenses to vary the current and spot size of the electron beam (e-beam) generated from an electron gun. In SEM, this beam is then focused using an electromagnetic objective lens and rastered across the sample by a set of scan coils.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Similar to optical microscopy, electron microscopy also has both reflection and transmission modes—these are two separate imaging techniques known as &#039;&#039;&#039;Scanning Electron Microscopy (SEM)&#039;&#039;&#039; and  &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM)]]&#039;&#039;&#039;, respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Types of Electron Guns ===&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 main types of electron guns used in electron microscopy: thermionic (Schottky) emission and cold field emission. Both types required an electron source—typically this is either a single crystal of tungsten, lanthanum hexaboride (LaB&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;6&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;), or cerium hexaboride (CeB&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;6&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;). Both Phenom SEMs at the MILL use thermionic emission guns with a CeB&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;6&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; source.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Software Features ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Automated Image Mapping (AIM)&#039;&#039;&#039;: SEMs will raster beam over a larger area of a sample at a given magnification and automatically stitch the caputured images together.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;3D Roughness Reconstruction (3DRR)&#039;&#039;&#039;: SEM will attempt to focus in a range of depths, then stitch together planes of features which are in focus to generate a 3D image representative of surface topology. This can be exported as an image or .stl file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Magnification &amp;amp; Resolution ==&lt;br /&gt;
SEMs can provide an additional 2 orders of magnitude in magnification and resolution when compared to optical microscopes, which typically max out around 1,000x magnification and 200 nm resolution. SEMs typically have around 100,000x magnification and 2 nm resolution. This additional resolution is governed by the Abbe equation and de Broglie wave equation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Proof ===&lt;br /&gt;
Abbe’s equation defines the theoretical maximum resolution of a microscope, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\delta&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; as:&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\delta=\frac{k\lambda}{n\sin(\alpha)}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;k = 0.61&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is an empirical constant, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;n&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is the refractive index, and  &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\alpha&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is the aperture half-angle. The term in the denominator, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;n\sin{\alpha)}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, is also known as the &#039;&#039;numerical aperture&#039;&#039;, or nA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In optical microscopy, Abbe’s equation simplifies to &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\delta=\frac{0.61\lambda}{nA}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, where the numerical aperture at high magnifications typically levels out at &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;nA \approx 1.35&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. Plugging in the &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lambda&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; for green light gives:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\delta=\frac{0.61\cdot500\textrm{nm}}{1.35}=226\textnormal{nm}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In electron microscopy, the refractive index is typically 1, since the chamber is pumped down to near-vacuum conditions, and the aperture half-angle is typically very small. Using the [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Small-angle_approximation small-angle approximation], we can simplify Abbe’s equation to &lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\delta=\frac{0.61\lambda}{\alpha}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since electron microscopy uses an electron beam to image the sample, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lambda&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is now the de Broglie wavelength of an electron. The de Broglie wave equation states:&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lambda=\frac{h}{p}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;h&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is Planck’s constant and &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;p&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is momentum. Recall that kinetic energy is defined as:&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\textrm{KE} = \frac{1}{2}mv^2&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\therefore p=mv=\sqrt{2m(\textrm{KE})}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Electron microscopes such as SEMs typically have a controllable accelerating voltage—this term affects the kinetic energy of the e-beam by the fundamental relation: &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\textrm{KE} = e\textrm{V}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;e&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is the elementary charge. Plugging in for momentum and kinetic energy, we get:&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\therefore \lambda=\frac{h}{\sqrt{2me\textrm{V}}}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, by plugging in all constants and assuming a small aperture half-angle of 0.01 rad (must use radians for small-angle approximation), the following resolutions can be obtained for varying accelerating voltages. Note that these calculations use Newtonian equations, not Einsteinian (relativistic) equations.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Accelerating Voltage (kV) !! de Broglie Wavelength (nm) !! Abbe Resolution (nm)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 5 || .0173 || 1.06&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 10 || .0123 || .751&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 15 || .0100 || .613&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 100 || .00388 pm || .237&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Limitations ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ElectronInteractionVolume.png|thumb|350px|right|Electron Interaction Volume with Matter (note: backscattered electrons should be abbreviated as BSE)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;© User:Claudionico / Wikimedia Commons / CC-BY-SA-4.0]]&lt;br /&gt;
Despite the near-atomic resolution claimed by Abbe’s equation at higher accelerating voltages, SEMs struggle to reach beyond nanometer-level resolution, and therefore cannot see individual atoms. There are many variables which cause the reduction in practical resolution, so only major factors are listed here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Interaction Volume===&lt;br /&gt;
The first limitation is electron interaction volume. When a high energy electron beam strikes the sample, electrons penetrate the sample and knock free other electrons, ballooning into a relatively large interaction volume. The greater the accelerating voltage, the greater the interaction volume—therefore, SEMs must balance the improvement in theoretical Abbe resolution from a higher energy and the decrease in resolution from larger interaction volumes at high accelerating voltages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Interaction volume typically has a diameter in the micron range for bulk samples and a diameter in the same order as sample thickness for thin foils used in TEM. This tiny interaction volume is also why extremely thin (&amp;lt;50nm) TEM foils can get down to atomic resolution. For SEM samples, noise and overlapping signals from different areas of a sample will blur an image if the accelerating voltage and interaction volume are too large. Ideally, interaction volume diameter should approximate the size of sample features to get sharp images.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Aberrations ===&lt;br /&gt;
Aberrations occur when a lens fails to converge all rays at a single point and the image becomes out of focus. There are two types of aberrations: spherical and chromatic. In SEM, spherical aberrations occur when electrons near the edges of an electromagnetic lens are bent inconsistently compared to electrons at the center of the lens and fail to converge—this can be fixed by using a smaller aperture. Chromatic aberrations occur when the electron beam is not of uniform energy, causing the electromagnetic lens to bend electrons of differing energies to different points on the focal plane. Both of these phenomena derive their names from the same photon-based effects in optical microscopy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Astigmatism===&lt;br /&gt;
Astigmatism in SEM occurs due to fluctuations in magnetic field strength, which may be caused by defects in the electron column core, source contamination, or magnetic samples. This typically results in the blurring or stretching of the SEM image, and can be corrected using stigmation coils. Most SEMs have both an X and Y stigmator knobs for correcting stretching, as well as an auto-stigmation feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Information Provided by SEM Emissions==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SEM-EmissionMechanisms.png|350px|thumb|right|SE, BSE, and characteristic X-ray Emissions&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;© Rob Hurt / Wikimedia Commons / CC-BY-SA-4.0]]&lt;br /&gt;
When primary electrons (PE) from the e-beam inelastically interact with electrons in the sample, they transfer a significant portion of their kinetic energy to another electron, which is then ejected as a secondary electron (SE). Other times, primary electrons can &amp;quot;slingshot&amp;quot; around atomic nuclei and return while only losing a negligible amount of energy. This is an elastic interaction, and the returned primary electrons are redubbed backscattered electrons (BSD). While SE have energies in the 10s of eVs, BSE return with the same initial energy, which varies based on accelerating voltage (10 kV accelerating voltage &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Rightarrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; 10 keV of energy). Therefore, SEMs primarily handle 2 detectors used for imaging: these are the secondary electron detector (SED) and the backscattered electron detector (BSD).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SED ===&lt;br /&gt;
Secondary electrons give an image which shows &#039;&#039;&#039;topographical&#039;&#039;&#039; features and a relatively large [[#Depth of Field|depth of field]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since SEs have such low energies, they can only escape when present in the sample&#039;s surface (the top several nm). This also means SEs have low interaction volume, and have resolutions on the nm level. The most common type of SED is the Everhart-Thornley (ET) detector, which are placed off-center from the sample to provide better contrast between SEs coming from different areas on the sample surface in exchange for slightly worse signal-to-noise ratio. The reasoning for sacrificing signal is because SE yields (# of emitted SEs per PE) are over 100%&amp;amp;mdash;this is because high-energy PEs undergoing inelastic interactions can dislodge multiple SEs at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== BSD ===&lt;br /&gt;
Backscattered electrons give elemental contrast (Z-contrast), but by using a 4-quadrant detector, some topographical features are also resolvable. Turning off half of a 4-quadrant BSD works similarly to ET SEDs, where one side of sample will appear brighter than the other side. Note that these topographical modes do lose some Z-contrast in the process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
BSEs are very high energy, and therefore penetrate deeper into the sample than SEs. This larger interaction volume results in BSD resolutions in the 100s of nm, 2 orders of magnitude worse than SEDs. Additionally, BSE yields are typically under 50% because they cannot &amp;quot;share&amp;quot; their initial energy and some BSEs become trapped in atomic orbitals. Z-contrast occurs because of increasing nucleus size through the periodic table&amp;amp;mdash;heavier nuclei will more effectively &amp;quot;slingshot&amp;quot; PEs, result in greater counts for heavier atoms and lower counts for lighter atoms. This is typically displayed by making atomically heavier areas of the sample bright and atomically lighter areas of the sample dark.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== EDS ===&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, inelastic interactions which dislodge secondary electrons leave an electron vacancy which must be quenched, similar to &#039;&#039;&#039;[[X-ray Fluorescence Spectrometer (XRF) | X-ray fluorescence spectroscopy (XRF)]]&#039;&#039;&#039;. The resulting vacancy is quenched, and the surplus energy is ejected as a secondary characteristic X-ray. Since energy drops between electrons levels in a given atom are discrete and distinct, a detector which can catch these secondary X-rays would be able to determine elemental composition. This is known as energy-dispersive X-ray spectroscopy (EDS/EDX), as is very common in SEM systems. Unlike XRF, secondary X-rays are only emitted from a small spot&amp;amp;mdash;more specifically, it is sensitive to interaction volume, which is typically 1-2 μm in diameter for characteristic X-rays, with a spot size of a few nm. For comparison XRF depth ranges from several μm to a few mm, and irradiates the entire sample at once. This makes EDS &#039;&#039;slightly&#039;&#039; more surface sensitive, while XRF is more bulk sensitive. In SEM, rastering the e-beam source across the sample generates an EDS map, which is useful to measue elemental composition of specific surface features such as pores and inclusions, as well as compositional differeneces across grain boundaries.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== EBSD ===&lt;br /&gt;
Electron backscatter diffraction (EBSD) is a characterization technique found in some SEMs which gives detailed crystollographic information typically only available from techniques such as TEM or XRD. EBSD requires a crystalline sample polished to a flat surface to improve the signal-to-noise ratio of diffraction bands and lattice quality. The sample must also be highly tilted (~70º from horizontal) with respect to the diffraction camera (placed perpendicular to the e-beam) to increase diffraction contrast for the camera&#039;s phosphor screen, and the sample must be placed extremely close to the camera to increase signal (low working distance, WD &amp;lt; 5mm for most SEMs). The backscattered electrons which escape at this specific angle must follow the [[X-ray Diffractometer (XRD)#Bragg&#039;s Law|Bragg diffraction condition]], resulting signal bands seen on the camera known as &#039;&#039;Kikuchi lines&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;Kikuchi bands&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DOF-diagram.png|300px|thumb|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
==Depth of Field==&lt;br /&gt;
Electron microscopy, specifically when detecting secondary electrons, has a superior depth of field compared to optical microscopy. Depth of field is a objective measure of the ability of a microscope to simultaneously focus at multiple depth&amp;amp;mdash;more specifically, it is the &amp;quot;acceptable range&amp;quot; of depths where sample features are still in focus. Mathematically, depth of field, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;D&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, can be approximated by:&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;D=\frac{2r}{\tan{\alpha}}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;r&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is the radius of the viewing spot, and &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\alpha&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is again the aperture half-angle. This formula can be confirmed upon inspection of the diagram to the right. This small aperture half-angle is what gives SEMs a much better depth of field that optical microscopes, whose aperture half angles are much larger. For SEMs, we can once again use the small-angle approximation to simplify this to:&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;D=\frac{2r}{\alpha}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Since depth of field is subjective and based on the image itself, note that this viewing spot is actually the defined by the area on the sample which corresponds to a single pixel of the image. This area can therefore be calculated using the SEM&#039;s field of view, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;W_\textrm{FOV}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, and the pixel width of the image, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;W_\textrm{pix}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;2r=\frac{W_\textrm{FOV}}{W_\textrm{pix}}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, if given the image&#039;s actual pixel size (a constant diameter), &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;P&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, we can define magnification, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;M&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, to be:&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;M=\frac{P}{2r} \rightarrow 2r=\frac{P}{M}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This shows that the size of the viewing spot depends on image magnification: therefore, magnification also affects the depth of field.&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\therefore D=\frac{P}{M\alpha}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From this equation, we can see that lowering either the aperture half-angle or the magnification will result in a greater depth of field in SEMs. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Working Distance===&lt;br /&gt;
Since magnification cannot be changed if we want to continue to view small features, the aperture can be tweaked through the working distance, or WD. WD is the distance between the bottom pole piece of the objective lens and the specimen. Given the objective aperture radius &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;R&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\alpha&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; can be defined as:&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\alpha=\frac{R}{\textrm{WD}}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
WD typically falls between 5-9 mm when using secondary electron detectors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Common SEM Issues==&lt;br /&gt;
SEMs run into several unavoidable issues which requires users to prepare and analyze samples more carefully.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Sample Charging===&lt;br /&gt;
Since SEMs blast a sample with electrons, samples will always charge wil imaging. The polarity of charge depends on the sample, but typically the sample emits more electrons than the number of incident primary electrons due to a SE yield of over 100%. Therefore, the sample becomes slightly positively charged. A charged sample results in several complications for SEM, whether positively or negatively charged. Charged samples will deflect both the primary e-beam at the surface and the emitted electrons. This disturbs focus, depth of field, and contrast, distorts and drifts the image, creates random dark and bright spots/streaks on the image, and in extreme cases, charging can even break parts of the specimen and damage the detector and source.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To avoid this, several precautions can be taken during sample prep and during analysis. Firstly, either carbon or copper tape should be used to afix the sample to the sample stub or holder so that the sample is grounded. This allows electrons to freely travel to fill electron-holes in the sample to maintain a neutral charge. Non-conductive samples should be coated with gold nanoparticles (see [[Sputter Coater]]) to make the sample conductive&amp;amp;mdash;this allows topographical features to still be visible, although it will dampen contrast in BSD images and muddle EDS with gold peaks. If BSD or EDS are wanted, the sample should instead be imaged at a low accelerating voltage on the SEM (5kV) and rastering speed should be increased to avoid significant charging at any one spot. Conductive samples simply need to be grounded to the sample stub or holder. For samples mounted in a hot mounting press, use a conductive mounting compound (such as conductive phenolic powders) or afix carbon or copper tape directly onto the sample surface and ground point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Sample Etching===&lt;br /&gt;
When a higher energy e-beam rasters across one region for a prolonged duration, it may &amp;quot;etch&amp;quot; the sample by depositing a thin layer of residue. This residue comes from gases which were not pumped out by the vacuum, namely, hydrocarbons and water. High energy electrons can help water and carbon &amp;quot;stick&amp;quot; ot the sample, and upon increasing your field of view in the imaging software, a darkened box may be visible on your sample—this is a sign of etching. This phenomena is especially prevalent at higher magnifications, where the beam continually rasters over an even smaller spot. This is unpreventable, but during analysis, it is recommended to not stay in one place for a long time and to keep moving around. When examining small features that require high magnification, focus on another small feature in the same plane as your feature, then move to your area of interest to avoid etching imporant areas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;quot;Dangerous&amp;quot; Samples===&lt;br /&gt;
Any sample with loose particles may break under an intense e-beam and damage the detector and source&amp;amp;mdash;samples must be firmly attached to the sample stub or holder. Because lenses in electron microscopes are controlled using precise electromagnetic fields, magnetic samples may permamently damage the objective lens and are therefore not allowed in many SEMs. Porous samples suck as rock and concrete may contain trapped gases which may degas if put under high vacuum in the SEM. These gases may damage the detector and source, so samples should be degassed (and dried) before analysis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Theory &amp;amp; Techniques==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Sputter Coater]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Optical Microscopy]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM)]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[X-ray Fluorescence Spectrometer (XRF)]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[X-ray Diffractometer (XRD)]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[X-ray Notation]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Equipment|char]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=39206</id>
		<title>Main Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=39206"/>
		<updated>2021-09-20T16:18:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: /* Learning and Development (L&amp;amp;D) Teams */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The Materials Innovation and Learning Laboratory (The MILL) is an open access undergraduate student-run make-and-measure space sponsored by the School of Materials Science &amp;amp; Engineering at Georgia Tech. We are based in the Love Manufacturing Building (Rm 176). The MILL provides a safe and relaxed discovery space to gain hands-on experience with common discipline techniques, including the characterization of materials’ chemistry and structure, the measurement of material properties, and materials processing. All Georgia Tech students, faculty, and staff have open access to learn about any of our equipment during our open hours under the supervision of one of our MILL staffers, managed through our equipment teams.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We strive to serve as Georgia Tech’s Hub for experiential education in MSE, providing students with hands-on scientific training and inquiry-based discovery science and engineering design for class projects, team-based capstone design, laboratory courses, independent or group research, and entrepreneurial pursuits. The MILL encourages any and all Georgia Tech students to come visit our space, join our teams, or participate in events hosted by our L&amp;amp;D teams!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== About the MILL wiki ==&lt;br /&gt;
The MILL Wiki serves as an informational and educational portal about the resources found in the MILL. Like Wikipedia, anyone can contribute to the site—if you would like to learn more about how to contribute, check out our [[MILL Wiki Contributor Guide]] and our [[Sample Page Template]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Navigation ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:Category:Equipment | Equipment and techniques list]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:Category:Software | List of distributable software]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:Category:Theory | Scientific theory articles]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:Category:Materials | Materials at The MILL]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:Category:Research | Areas of MSE research at GT and beyond]] &#039;&#039;(coming soon!)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LoveBuilding1.png|300px|thumb|right|Love Manufacturing Building, home of The MILL]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Teams ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Executive Team ===&lt;br /&gt;
* Meet our [https://mill.mse.gatech.edu/about-us/exec-council/ Exec Council]&lt;br /&gt;
* Meet the [https://mill.mse.gatech.edu/about-us/mill-fellows/ MILL Fellows]&lt;br /&gt;
=== [https://mill.mse.gatech.edu/equipment/about/ Equipment Teams] ===&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://mill.mse.gatech.edu/equipment/characterization-team/ Characterization Team]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://mill.mse.gatech.edu/equipment/measurement-team/ Measurement Team]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://mill.mse.gatech.edu/equipment/processing-team/ Processing Team]&lt;br /&gt;
=== [https://mill.mse.gatech.edu/ld-teams/about/ Learning and Development (L&amp;amp;D) Teams] ===&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://mill.mse.gatech.edu/ld-teams/soa-team/ Science of Art (SOA)]&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://mill.mse.gatech.edu/ld-teams/textiles-team/ Textiles Team]&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/ld-teams/materialbusters/ MaterialBusters]&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://sites.gatech.edu/mse-mill/ld-teams/sustainability-committee/ Sustainability Committee]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://mill.mse.gatech.edu/ld-teams/retired/ Retired L&amp;amp;D Teams]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:About]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=X-ray_Diffraction&amp;diff=39196</id>
		<title>X-ray Diffraction</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=X-ray_Diffraction&amp;diff=39196"/>
		<updated>2021-08-05T20:42:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: /* Related Theory */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; | ARL Equinox 100 XRD&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:XRD-052621.png|center|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;2\theta&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; Range&#039;&#039;&#039;: 0&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;^\circ&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; to 110&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;^{\circ}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Source&#039;&#039;&#039;: Cu Kα, λ = 1.5406Å&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Sample Type&#039;&#039;&#039;: Powders&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;X-ray diffractometry (XRD)&#039;&#039;&#039; detects crystalline phases in a sample by measuring the diffraction pattern of X-rays at varying angles. X-rays are used because the interplanar spacing for the vast majority of crystalline materials falls in the range of X-ray wavelengths (0.01-10 nm). The MILL’s XRD is set up for powder X-ray diffraction: for the best results, samples should be ground into a fine powder so that the collective group of crystals has a random orientation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Operation ==&lt;br /&gt;
Anyone who wishes to use or be trained on the XRD must undergo the general lab safety training &#039;&#039;&#039;AND&#039;&#039;&#039; the Georgia Tech Office of Radiological Safety (ORS) X-Ray Safety Training before reporting to the XRD Technical Officer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Theory ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bragg_xrd.png|thumb|400px|Constructive interference of scattered X-rays in a BCC structure. The phase shifts differ by a factor of half the interplanar spacing distance.]]&lt;br /&gt;
XRDs use an X-ray source to generate a beam of X-rays that are reflected off crystalline planes in the sample material. A detector, which typically rotates around the sample, captures a set of reflected X-rays corresponding to different planar orientations. When each plane of atoms reflects the incident beam, the reflected wave has a specific sinusoidal offset, or phase shift. The reflected X-rays from all planes form a &#039;&#039;&#039;diffraction pattern&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At certain angles, planes may reflect waves with phase shifts separated by the wavelength of the incident X-ray. These reflected X-rays align and recombine into a more intense X-ray, a phenomenon known as &#039;&#039;&#039;constructive interference&#039;&#039;&#039;. Otherwise, the electromagnetic waves instead cancel each other out, undergoing &#039;&#039;&#039;destructive interference&#039;&#039;&#039;. We can measure the diffraction intensity at each angle to determine the orientation of crystals in the sample. Because crystalline materials typically contain equally separated planes, we can also use the intensity data to calculate the separation between two planes of atoms. This allows us to calculate the lattice parameter, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;a&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, for virtually any crystalline structure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bragg&#039;s Law ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:NaCl_xrd.png|thumb|400px|Powder X-ray diffraction data from polycrystalline NaCl, using a detector range from 0&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;^\circ&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; to 60&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;^\circ&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;.]]&lt;br /&gt;
Given a constant interplanar spacing &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, angle of reflection &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\theta&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, X-ray wavelength &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lambda&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, and any positive integer &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;n&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, we can express Bragg&#039;s Law, the fundamental equation of diffraction. As seen in Figure 3, the sine of the angle of reflection represents the number of wavelengths in the corresponding phase shift over the interplanar atomic spacing.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\sin(\theta) = (\frac{n\lambda}{2d})&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Or more commonly:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;2d\sin(\theta) = n\lambda&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a family of planes corresponding to the Miller indices &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\{h,k,l\}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, denote the normal vector to that plane as:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;{\bf\vec{N}} = \langle h, k, l \rangle&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Vert{\bf\vec{N}}\Vert = \sqrt{h^2 + k^2 + l^2}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that in a cubic crystal: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;d = \frac{a}{\Vert{\bf\vec{N}}\Vert}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a given crystal, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\frac{\lambda}{2a}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is constant. Therefore:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\sin(\theta) = \Vert{\bf\vec{N}}\Vert(\frac{\lambda}{2a})&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\frac{\sin(\theta_1)}{\sin(\theta_2)} = \frac{\Vert{\bf\vec{N_1}}\Vert}{\Vert{\bf\vec{N_2}}\Vert}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This relation between reflection angle and the Miller indices allows us to determine crystal structures from an XRD plot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Data ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the angle of reflection is theta, the angle between the incident and reflected waves is &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;2\theta&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. In the plot, we represent the range of angles as &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;2\theta&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, on the x-axis, while detection intensity is measured on the y-axis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a specific family of planes, there are distinct diffraction patterns—there are two important rules which allow us to use peak data to determine if a material is BCC or FCC. For BCC structures, the sum of the Miller indices, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;h + k + l&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, must be even for diffraction to occur on the &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\{h,k,l\}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; family of planes. For the FCC structure, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\{h,k,l\}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; must all have the same parity (all even or all odd).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Theory==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Scanning Electron Microscope (SEM)#EBSD|Electron backscatter diffraction (EBSD)]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Equipment|char]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=X-ray_Diffraction&amp;diff=39195</id>
		<title>X-ray Diffraction</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=X-ray_Diffraction&amp;diff=39195"/>
		<updated>2021-08-05T20:42:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; | ARL Equinox 100 XRD&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:XRD-052621.png|center|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;2\theta&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; Range&#039;&#039;&#039;: 0&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;^\circ&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; to 110&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;^{\circ}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Source&#039;&#039;&#039;: Cu Kα, λ = 1.5406Å&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Sample Type&#039;&#039;&#039;: Powders&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;X-ray diffractometry (XRD)&#039;&#039;&#039; detects crystalline phases in a sample by measuring the diffraction pattern of X-rays at varying angles. X-rays are used because the interplanar spacing for the vast majority of crystalline materials falls in the range of X-ray wavelengths (0.01-10 nm). The MILL’s XRD is set up for powder X-ray diffraction: for the best results, samples should be ground into a fine powder so that the collective group of crystals has a random orientation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Operation ==&lt;br /&gt;
Anyone who wishes to use or be trained on the XRD must undergo the general lab safety training &#039;&#039;&#039;AND&#039;&#039;&#039; the Georgia Tech Office of Radiological Safety (ORS) X-Ray Safety Training before reporting to the XRD Technical Officer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Theory ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bragg_xrd.png|thumb|400px|Constructive interference of scattered X-rays in a BCC structure. The phase shifts differ by a factor of half the interplanar spacing distance.]]&lt;br /&gt;
XRDs use an X-ray source to generate a beam of X-rays that are reflected off crystalline planes in the sample material. A detector, which typically rotates around the sample, captures a set of reflected X-rays corresponding to different planar orientations. When each plane of atoms reflects the incident beam, the reflected wave has a specific sinusoidal offset, or phase shift. The reflected X-rays from all planes form a &#039;&#039;&#039;diffraction pattern&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At certain angles, planes may reflect waves with phase shifts separated by the wavelength of the incident X-ray. These reflected X-rays align and recombine into a more intense X-ray, a phenomenon known as &#039;&#039;&#039;constructive interference&#039;&#039;&#039;. Otherwise, the electromagnetic waves instead cancel each other out, undergoing &#039;&#039;&#039;destructive interference&#039;&#039;&#039;. We can measure the diffraction intensity at each angle to determine the orientation of crystals in the sample. Because crystalline materials typically contain equally separated planes, we can also use the intensity data to calculate the separation between two planes of atoms. This allows us to calculate the lattice parameter, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;a&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, for virtually any crystalline structure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bragg&#039;s Law ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:NaCl_xrd.png|thumb|400px|Powder X-ray diffraction data from polycrystalline NaCl, using a detector range from 0&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;^\circ&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; to 60&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;^\circ&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;.]]&lt;br /&gt;
Given a constant interplanar spacing &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, angle of reflection &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\theta&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, X-ray wavelength &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lambda&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, and any positive integer &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;n&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, we can express Bragg&#039;s Law, the fundamental equation of diffraction. As seen in Figure 3, the sine of the angle of reflection represents the number of wavelengths in the corresponding phase shift over the interplanar atomic spacing.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\sin(\theta) = (\frac{n\lambda}{2d})&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Or more commonly:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;2d\sin(\theta) = n\lambda&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a family of planes corresponding to the Miller indices &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\{h,k,l\}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, denote the normal vector to that plane as:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;{\bf\vec{N}} = \langle h, k, l \rangle&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Vert{\bf\vec{N}}\Vert = \sqrt{h^2 + k^2 + l^2}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that in a cubic crystal: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;d = \frac{a}{\Vert{\bf\vec{N}}\Vert}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a given crystal, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\frac{\lambda}{2a}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is constant. Therefore:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\sin(\theta) = \Vert{\bf\vec{N}}\Vert(\frac{\lambda}{2a})&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\frac{\sin(\theta_1)}{\sin(\theta_2)} = \frac{\Vert{\bf\vec{N_1}}\Vert}{\Vert{\bf\vec{N_2}}\Vert}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This relation between reflection angle and the Miller indices allows us to determine crystal structures from an XRD plot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Data ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the angle of reflection is theta, the angle between the incident and reflected waves is &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;2\theta&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. In the plot, we represent the range of angles as &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;2\theta&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, on the x-axis, while detection intensity is measured on the y-axis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a specific family of planes, there are distinct diffraction patterns—there are two important rules which allow us to use peak data to determine if a material is BCC or FCC. For BCC structures, the sum of the Miller indices, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;h + k + l&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, must be even for diffraction to occur on the &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\{h,k,l\}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; family of planes. For the FCC structure, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\{h,k,l\}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; must all have the same parity (all even or all odd).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Theory==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Scanning Electron Microscope (SEM)#EBSD]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Equipment|char]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Scanning_Electron_Microscopy&amp;diff=39194</id>
		<title>Scanning Electron Microscopy</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Scanning_Electron_Microscopy&amp;diff=39194"/>
		<updated>2021-08-05T20:40:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{| class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!|&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; |PhenomXL SEM&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; |Phenom ProX SEM&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;||[[File:PhenomXL.png|center|250px]]||[[File:PhenomProX.png|center|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Magnification Range&#039;&#039;&#039;:||160x to 200,000x||80x to 130,000x&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Accelerating Voltages&#039;&#039;&#039;:|| 4.8 kV to 20.5 kV (advanced mode)|| 5, 10, or 15 kV ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Feature Resolution&#039;&#039;&#039;:|| ~10nm || ~14nm&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Detectors&#039;&#039;&#039;:||Secondary (SED) &amp;amp; Backscatter (BSD)||Backscatter only&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Capabilities&#039;&#039;&#039;:|| EDS, AIM, 3DRR || EDS&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Sample Dimensions&#039;&#039;&#039;:|| max. 10 cm x 10 cm, 4 cm (h); or 36 stubs || max. 3.2 cm (ø), 3 cm (h)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Scanning electron microscopy (SEM) rasters an electron beam across a specific area on a sample, allowing for much higher magnifications compared to optical microscopy. The electrons are either elastically or inelastically reflected off the sample, then captured by detector(s) to yield an image.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Electron Microscopy ==&lt;br /&gt;
Electron and optical microscopy share many fundamental components—specifically, a lens used to focus a specific type of source, and after either reflecting from or transmitting through the sample, a “signal” is then captured by a detector which processes inputs and spits out an image. In optical microscopy, an optical glass lens focuses photons from a lamp into either a digital camera or your eye. In electron microscopy, a series of variable magnetic fields serve as condenser lenses to vary the current and spot size of the electron beam (e-beam) generated from an electron gun. In SEM, this beam is then focused using an electromagnetic objective lens and rastered across the sample by a set of scan coils.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Similar to optical microscopy, electron microscopy also has both reflection and transmission modes—these are two separate imaging techniques known as &#039;&#039;&#039;Scanning Electron Microscopy (SEM)&#039;&#039;&#039; and  &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM)]]&#039;&#039;&#039;, respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Types of Electron Guns ===&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 main types of electron guns used in electron microscopy: thermionic (Schottky) emission and cold field emission. Both types required an electron source—typically this is either a single crystal of tungsten, lanthanum hexaboride (LaB&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;6&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;), or cerium hexaboride (CeB&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;6&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;). Both Phenom SEMs at the MILL use thermionic emission guns with a CeB&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;6&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt; source.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Software Features ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Automated Image Mapping (AIM)&#039;&#039;&#039;: SEMs will raster beam over a larger area of a sample at a given magnification and automatically stitch the caputured images together.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;3D Roughness Reconstruction (3DRR)&#039;&#039;&#039;: SEM will attempt to focus in a range of depths, then stitch together planes of features which are in focus to generate a 3D image representative of surface topology. This can be exported as an image or .stl file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Magnification &amp;amp; Resolution ==&lt;br /&gt;
SEMs can provide an additional 2 orders of magnitude in magnification and resolution when compared to optical microscopes, which typically max out around 1,000x magnification and 200 nm resolution. SEMs typically have around 100,000x magnification and 2 nm resolution. This additional resolution is governed by the Abbe equation and de Broglie wave equation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Proof ===&lt;br /&gt;
Abbe’s equation defines the theoretical maximum resolution of a microscope, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\delta&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; as:&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\delta=\frac{k\lambda}{n\sin(\alpha)}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;k = 0.61&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is an empirical constant, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;n&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is the refractive index, and  &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\alpha&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is the aperture half-angle. The term in the denominator, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;n\sin{\alpha)}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, is also known as the &#039;&#039;numerical aperture&#039;&#039;, or nA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In optical microscopy, Abbe’s equation simplifies to &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\delta=\frac{0.61\lambda}{nA}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, where the numerical aperture at high magnifications typically levels out at &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;nA \approx 1.35&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. Plugging in the &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lambda&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; for green light gives:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\delta=\frac{0.61\cdot500\textrm{nm}}{1.35}=226\textnormal{nm}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In electron microscopy, the refractive index is typically 1, since the chamber is pumped down to near-vacuum conditions, and the aperture half-angle is typically very small. Using the [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Small-angle_approximation small-angle approximation], we can simplify Abbe’s equation to &lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\delta=\frac{0.61\lambda}{\alpha}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since electron microscopy uses an electron beam to image the sample, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lambda&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is now the de Broglie wavelength of an electron. The de Broglie wave equation states:&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lambda=\frac{h}{p}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;h&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is Planck’s constant and &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;p&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is momentum. Recall that kinetic energy is defined as:&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\textrm{KE} = \frac{1}{2}mv^2&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\therefore p=mv=\sqrt{2m(\textrm{KE})}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Electron microscopes such as SEMs typically have a controllable accelerating voltage—this term affects the kinetic energy of the e-beam by the fundamental relation: &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\textrm{KE} = e\textrm{V}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;e&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is the elementary charge. Plugging in for momentum and kinetic energy, we get:&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\therefore \lambda=\frac{h}{\sqrt{2me\textrm{V}}}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, by plugging in all constants and assuming a small aperture half-angle of 0.01 rad (must use radians for small-angle approximation), the following resolutions can be obtained for varying accelerating voltages. Note that these calculations use Newtonian equations, not Einsteinian (relativistic) equations.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Accelerating Voltage (kV) !! de Broglie Wavelength (nm) !! Abbe Resolution (nm)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 5 || .0173 || 1.06&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 10 || .0123 || .751&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 15 || .0100 || .613&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 100 || .00388 pm || .237&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Limitations ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ElectronInteractionVolume.png|thumb|350px|right|Electron Interaction Volume with Matter (note: backscattered electrons should be abbreviated as BSE)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;© User:Claudionico / Wikimedia Commons / CC-BY-SA-4.0]]&lt;br /&gt;
Despite the near-atomic resolution claimed by Abbe’s equation at higher accelerating voltages, SEMs struggle to reach beyond nanometer-level resolution, and therefore cannot see individual atoms. There are many variables which cause the reduction in practical resolution, so only major factors are listed here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Interaction Volume===&lt;br /&gt;
The first limitation is electron interaction volume. When a high energy electron beam strikes the sample, electrons penetrate the sample and knock free other electrons, ballooning into a relatively large interaction volume. The greater the accelerating voltage, the greater the interaction volume—therefore, SEMs must balance the improvement in theoretical Abbe resolution from a higher energy and the decrease in resolution from larger interaction volumes at high accelerating voltages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Interaction volume typically has a diameter in the micron range for bulk samples and a diameter in the same order as sample thickness for thin foils used in TEM. This tiny interaction volume is also why extremely thin (&amp;lt;50nm) TEM foils can get down to atomic resolution. For SEM samples, noise and overlapping signals from different areas of a sample will blur an image if the accelerating voltage and interaction volume are too large. Ideally, interaction volume diameter should approximate the size of sample features to get sharp images.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Aberrations ===&lt;br /&gt;
Aberrations occur when a lens fails to converge all rays at a single point and the image becomes out of focus. There are two types of aberrations: spherical and chromatic. In SEM, spherical aberrations occur when electrons near the edges of an electromagnetic lens are bent inconsistently compared to electrons at the center of the lens and fail to converge—this can be fixed by using a smaller aperture. Chromatic aberrations occur when the electron beam is not of uniform energy, causing the electromagnetic lens to bend electrons of differing energies to different points on the focal plane. Both of these phenomena derive their names from the same photon-based effects in optical microscopy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Astigmatism===&lt;br /&gt;
Astigmatism in SEM occurs due to fluctuations in magnetic field strength, which may be caused by defects in the electron column core, source contamination, or magnetic samples. This typically results in the blurring or stretching of the SEM image, and can be corrected using stigmation coils. Most SEMs have both an X and Y stigmator knobs for correcting stretching, as well as an auto-stigmation feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Information Provided by SEM Emissions==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SEM-EmissionMechanisms.png|350px|thumb|right|SE, BSE, and characteristic X-ray Emissions&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;© Rob Hurt / Wikimedia Commons / CC-BY-SA-4.0]]&lt;br /&gt;
When primary electrons (PE) from the e-beam inelastically interact with electrons in the sample, they transfer a significant portion of their kinetic energy to another electron, which is then ejected as a secondary electron (SE). Other times, primary electrons can &amp;quot;slingshot&amp;quot; around atomic nuclei and return while only losing a negligible amount of energy. This is an elastic interaction, and the returned primary electrons are redubbed backscattered electrons (BSD). While SE have energies in the 10s of eVs, BSE return with the same initial energy, which varies based on accelerating voltage (10 kV accelerating voltage &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Rightarrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; 10 keV of energy). Therefore, SEMs primarily handle 2 detectors used for imaging: these are the secondary electron detector (SED) and the backscattered electron detector (BSD).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SED ===&lt;br /&gt;
Secondary electrons give an image which shows &#039;&#039;&#039;topographical&#039;&#039;&#039; features and a relatively large [[#Depth of Field|depth of field]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since SEs have such low energies, they can only escape when present in the sample&#039;s surface (the top several nm). This also means SEs have low interaction volume, and have resolutions on the nm level. The most common type of SED is the Everhart-Thornley (ET) detector, which are placed off-center from the sample to provide better contrast between SEs coming from different areas on the sample surface in exchange for slightly worse signal-to-noise ratio. The reasoning for sacrificing signal is because SE yields (# of emitted SEs per PE) are over 100%&amp;amp;mdash;this is because high-energy PEs undergoing inelastic interactions can dislodge multiple SEs at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== BSD ===&lt;br /&gt;
Backscattered electrons give elemental contrast (Z-contrast), but by using a 4-quadrant detector, some topographical features are also resolvable. Turning off half of a 4-quadrant BSD works similarly to ET SEDs, where one side of sample will appear brighter than the other side. Note that these topographical modes do lose some Z-contrast in the process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
BSEs are very high energy, and therefore penetrate deeper into the sample than SEs. This larger interaction volume results in BSD resolutions in the 100s of nm, 2 orders of magnitude worse than SEDs. Additionally, BSE yields are typically under 50% because they cannot &amp;quot;share&amp;quot; their initial energy and some BSEs become trapped in atomic orbitals. Z-contrast occurs because of increasing nucleus size through the periodic table&amp;amp;mdash;heavier nuclei will more effectively &amp;quot;slingshot&amp;quot; PEs, result in greater counts for heavier atoms and lower counts for lighter atoms. This is typically displayed by making atomically heavier areas of the sample bright and atomically lighter areas of the sample dark.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== EDS ===&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, inelastic interactions which dislodge secondary electrons leave an electron vacancy which must be quenched, similar to &#039;&#039;&#039;[[X-ray Fluorescence Spectrometer (XRF) | X-ray fluorescence spectroscopy (XRF)]]&#039;&#039;&#039;. The resulting vacancy is quenched, and the surplus energy is ejected as a secondary characteristic X-ray. Since energy drops between electrons levels in a given atom are discrete and distinct, a detector which can catch these secondary X-rays would be able to determine elemental composition. This is known as energy-dispersive X-ray spectroscopy (EDS/EDX), as is very common in SEM systems. Unlike XRF, secondary X-rays are only emitted from a small spot&amp;amp;mdash;more specifically, it is sensitive to interaction volume, which is typically 1-2 μm in diameter for characteristic X-rays, with a spot size of a few nm. For comparison XRF depth ranges from several μm to a few mm, and irradiates the entire sample at once. This makes EDS &#039;&#039;slightly&#039;&#039; more surface sensitive, while XRF is more bulk sensitive. In SEM, rastering the e-beam source across the sample generates an EDS map, which is useful to measue elemental composition of specific surface features such as pores and inclusions, as well as compositional differeneces across grain boundaries.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== EBSD ===&lt;br /&gt;
Electron backscatter diffraction (EBSD) is a characterization technique found in some SEMs which gives detailed crystollographic information typically only available from techniques such as TEM or XRD. EBSD requires a crystalline sample polished to a flat surface to improve the signal-to-noise ratio of diffraction bands and lattice quality. The sample must also be highly tilted (~70º from horizontal) with respect to the diffraction camera (placed perpendicular to the e-beam) to increase diffraction contrast for the camera&#039;s phosphor screen, and the sample must be placed extremely close to the camera to increase signal (low working distance, WD &amp;lt; 5mm for most SEMs). The backscattered electrons which escape at this specific angle must follow the [[X-ray Diffractometer (XRD)#Bragg&#039;s Law|Bragg diffraction condition]], resulting signal bands seen on the camera known as &#039;&#039;Kikuchi lines&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;Kikuchi bands&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DOF-diagram.png|300px|thumb|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
==Depth of Field==&lt;br /&gt;
Electron microscopy, specifically when detecting secondary electrons, has a superior depth of field compared to optical microscopy. Depth of field is a objective measure of the ability of a microscope to simultaneously focus at multiple depth&amp;amp;mdash;more specifically, it is the &amp;quot;acceptable range&amp;quot; of depths where sample features are still in focus. Mathematically, depth of field, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;D&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, can be approximated by:&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;D=\frac{2r}{\tan{\alpha}}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;r&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is the radius of the viewing spot, and &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\alpha&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is again the aperture half-angle. This formula can be confirmed upon inspection of the diagram to the right. This small aperture half-angle is what gives SEMs a much better depth of field that optical microscopes, whose aperture half angles are much larger. For SEMs, we can once again use the small-angle approximation to simplify this to:&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;D=\frac{2r}{\alpha}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Since depth of field is subjective and based on the image itself, note that this viewing spot is actually the defined by the area on the sample which corresponds to a single pixel of the image. This area can therefore be calculated using the SEM&#039;s field of view, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;W_\textrm{FOV}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, and the pixel width of the image, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;W_\textrm{pix}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;2r=\frac{W_\textrm{FOV}}{W_\textrm{pix}}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, if given the image&#039;s actual pixel size (a constant diameter), &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;P&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, we can define magnification, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;M&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, to be:&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;M=\frac{P}{2r} \rightarrow 2r=\frac{P}{M}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This shows that the size of the viewing spot depends on image magnification: therefore, magnification also affects the depth of field.&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\therefore D=\frac{P}{M\alpha}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From this equation, we can see that lowering either the aperture half-angle or the magnification will result in a greater depth of field in SEMs. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Working Distance===&lt;br /&gt;
Since magnification cannot be changed if we want to continue to view small features, the aperture can be tweaked through the working distance, or WD. WD is the distance between the bottom pole piece of the objective lens and the specimen. Given the objective aperture radius &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;R&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\alpha&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; can be defined as:&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\alpha=\frac{R}{\textrm{WD}}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
WD typically falls between 5-9 mm when using secondary electron detectors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Common SEM Issues==&lt;br /&gt;
SEMs run into several unavoidable issues which requires users to prepare and analyze samples more carefully.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Sample Charging===&lt;br /&gt;
Since SEMs blast a sample with electrons, samples will always charge wil imaging. The polarity of charge depends on the sample, but typically the sample emits more electrons than the number of incident primary electrons due to a SE yield of over 100%. Therefore, the sample becomes slightly positively charged. A charged sample results in several complications for SEM, whether positively or negatively charged. Charged samples will deflect both the primary e-beam at the surface and the emitted electrons. This disturbs focus, depth of field, and contrast, distorts and drifts the image, creates random dark and bright spots/streaks on the image, and in extreme cases, charging can even break parts of the specimen and damage the detector and source.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To avoid this, several precautions can be taken during sample prep and during analysis. Firstly, either carbon or copper tape should be used to afix the sample to the sample stub or holder so that the sample is grounded. This allows electrons to freely travel to fill electron-holes in the sample to maintain a neutral charge. Non-conductive samples should be coated with gold nanoparticles (see [[Sputter Coater]]) to make the sample conductive&amp;amp;mdash;this allows topographical features to still be visible, although it will dampen contrast in BSD images and muddle EDS with gold peaks. If BSD or EDS are wanted, the sample should instead be imaged at a low accelerating voltage on the SEM (5kV) and rastering speed should be increased to avoid significant charging at any one spot. Conductive samples simply need to be grounded to the sample stub or holder. For samples mounted in a hot mounting press, use a conductive mounting compound (such as conductive phenolic powders) or afix carbon or copper tape directly onto the sample surface and ground point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Sample Etching===&lt;br /&gt;
When a higher energy e-beam rasters across one region for a prolonged duration, it may &amp;quot;etch&amp;quot; the sample by depositing a thin layer of residue. This residue comes from gases which were not pumped out by the vacuum, namely, hydrocarbons and water. High energy electrons can help water and carbon &amp;quot;stick&amp;quot; ot the sample, and upon increasing your field of view in the imaging software, a darkened box may be visible on your sample—this is a sign of etching. This phenomena is especially prevalent at higher magnifications, where the beam continually rasters over an even smaller spot. This is unpreventable, but during analysis, it is recommended to not stay in one place for a long time and to keep moving around. When examining small features that require high magnification, focus on another small feature in the same plane as your feature, then move to your area of interest to avoid etching imporant areas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;quot;Dangerous&amp;quot; Samples===&lt;br /&gt;
Any sample with loose particles may break under an intense e-beam and damage the detector and source&amp;amp;mdash;samples must be firmly attached to the sample stub or holder. Because lenses in electron microscopes are controlled using precise electromagnetic fields, magnetic samples may permamently damage the objective lens and are therefore not allowed in many SEMs. Porous samples suck as rock and concrete may contain trapped gases which may degas if put under high vacuum in the SEM. These gases may damage the detector and source, so samples should be degassed (and dried) before analysis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Theory &amp;amp; Techniques==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Sputter Coater]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Optical Microscopy]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM)]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[X-ray Fluorescence Spectrometer (XRF)]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[X-ray Diffractometer (XRD)]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[X-ray Notation]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Equipment|char]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=X-ray_Diffraction&amp;diff=39193</id>
		<title>X-ray Diffraction</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=X-ray_Diffraction&amp;diff=39193"/>
		<updated>2021-08-05T20:40:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; | ARL Equinox 100 XRD&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:XRD-052621.png|center|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;2\theta&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; Range&#039;&#039;&#039;: 0&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;^\circ&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; to 110&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;^{\circ}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Source&#039;&#039;&#039;: Cu Kα, λ = 1.5406Å&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Sample Type&#039;&#039;&#039;: Powders&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;X-ray diffractometry (XRD)&#039;&#039;&#039; detects crystalline phases in a sample by measuring the diffraction pattern of X-rays at varying angles. X-rays are used because the interplanar spacing for the vast majority of crystalline materials falls in the range of X-ray wavelengths (0.01-10 nm). The MILL’s XRD is set up for powder X-ray diffraction: for the best results, samples should be ground into a fine powder so that the collective group of crystals has a random orientation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Operation ==&lt;br /&gt;
Anyone who wishes to use or be trained on the XRD must undergo the general lab safety training &#039;&#039;&#039;AND&#039;&#039;&#039; the Georgia Tech Office of Radiological Safety (ORS) X-Ray Safety Training before reporting to the XRD Technical Officer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Theory ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bragg_xrd.png|thumb|400px|Constructive interference of scattered X-rays in a BCC structure. The phase shifts differ by a factor of half the interplanar spacing distance.]]&lt;br /&gt;
XRDs use an X-ray source to generate a beam of X-rays that are reflected off crystalline planes in the sample material. A detector, which typically rotates around the sample, captures a set of reflected X-rays corresponding to different planar orientations. When each plane of atoms reflects the incident beam, the reflected wave has a specific sinusoidal offset, or phase shift. The reflected X-rays from all planes form a &#039;&#039;&#039;diffraction pattern&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At certain angles, planes may reflect waves with phase shifts separated by the wavelength of the incident X-ray. These reflected X-rays align and recombine into a more intense X-ray, a phenomenon known as &#039;&#039;&#039;constructive interference&#039;&#039;&#039;. Otherwise, the electromagnetic waves instead cancel each other out, undergoing &#039;&#039;&#039;destructive interference&#039;&#039;&#039;. We can measure the diffraction intensity at each angle to determine the orientation of crystals in the sample. Because crystalline materials typically contain equally separated planes, we can also use the intensity data to calculate the separation between two planes of atoms. This allows us to calculate the lattice parameter, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;a&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, for virtually any crystalline structure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bragg&#039;s Law ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:NaCl_xrd.png|thumb|400px|Powder X-ray diffraction data from polycrystalline NaCl, using a detector range from 0&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;^\circ&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; to 60&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;^\circ&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;.]]&lt;br /&gt;
Given a constant interplanar spacing &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, angle of reflection &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\theta&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, X-ray wavelength &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lambda&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, and any positive integer &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;n&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, we can express Bragg&#039;s Law, the fundamental equation of diffraction. As seen in Figure 3, the sine of the angle of reflection represents the number of wavelengths in the corresponding phase shift over the interplanar atomic spacing.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\sin(\theta) = (\frac{n\lambda}{2d})&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Or more commonly:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;2d\sin(\theta) = n\lambda&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a family of planes corresponding to the Miller indices &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\{h,k,l\}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, denote the normal vector to that plane as:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;{\bf\vec{N}} = \langle h, k, l \rangle&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Vert{\bf\vec{N}}\Vert = \sqrt{h^2 + k^2 + l^2}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that in a cubic crystal: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;d = \frac{a}{\Vert{\bf\vec{N}}\Vert}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a given crystal, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\frac{\lambda}{2a}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is constant. Therefore:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\sin(\theta) = \Vert{\bf\vec{N}}\Vert(\frac{\lambda}{2a})&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\frac{\sin(\theta_1)}{\sin(\theta_2)} = \frac{\Vert{\bf\vec{N_1}}\Vert}{\Vert{\bf\vec{N_2}}\Vert}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This relation between reflection angle and the Miller indices allows us to determine crystal structures from an XRD plot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Data ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the angle of reflection is theta, the angle between the incident and reflected waves is &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;2\theta&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. In the plot, we represent the range of angles as &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;2\theta&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, on the x-axis, while detection intensity is measured on the y-axis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a specific family of planes, there are distinct diffraction patterns—there are two important rules which allow us to use peak data to determine if a material is BCC or FCC. For BCC structures, the sum of the Miller indices, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;h + k + l&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, must be even for diffraction to occur on the &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\{h,k,l\}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; family of planes. For the FCC structure, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\{h,k,l\}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; must all have the same parity (all even or all odd).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Theory==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Scanning Electron Microscope (SEM)|EBSD]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Equipment|char]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Thermogravimetric_Analysis&amp;diff=39192</id>
		<title>Thermogravimetric Analysis</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Thermogravimetric_Analysis&amp;diff=39192"/>
		<updated>2021-08-02T19:26:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{|class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; | TGA&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:TGA_080221.png|center|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Temperature Range:&#039;&#039;&#039; Ambient to 1000°C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Balance Capacity:&#039;&#039;&#039; 1500 mg&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Balance Precision:&#039;&#039;&#039; 0.001%&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thermogravimetric analysis (TGA) uses heat to force reactions and physical changes in materials&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;TGAoverview&amp;quot;&amp;gt; Intertek. (n.d.). Thermogravimetric Analysis (TGA) ASTM E1131, ISO 11358. https://www.intertek.com/polymers/testlopedia/tga-astm-e1131/. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;, and provides quantitative measurements of mass change associated with transition and thermal degradation. TGA records changes in a sample&#039;s mass from the dehydration, decomposition, and oxidation of a sample against changes in time and temperature. The characteristic thermogravimetric curves of materials and chemical compounds are given by unique sequences of physicochemical reactions, which occur at specific temperature ranges and heating rates depending on the sample&#039;s molecular structure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Principle ==&lt;br /&gt;
For classic thermogravimetry, a sample is usually put into a crucible out of inert material (e.g. platinum, alumina, gold…) and placed on a sensor within a furnace that can apply controlled atmospheres and temperatures&amp;lt;ref Name=&amp;quot;Linseis&amp;quot;&amp;gt; Thermogravimetric analysis - analytical method of [mg]. Linseis Messgeräte GmbH. (2020, November 26). https://www.linseis.com/en/methods/thermogravimetric-analysis/. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;. The sensor is connected to a high-resolution microbalance that records the mass change during the experiment. In most thermogravimetric analyzers, compensation balances are used for this purpose. A compensation balance is a special version of a balance where an electric magnet compensates the applied mass-lab balances often work according to the same principle. While the sample sees a change in heat, the balance is usually kept in a static temperature environment in a separate chamber or at a certain distance from the sensor. The exact temperature of the sample is monitored by thermocouples that use the Seebeck-effect for precise temperature determination.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TGA Diagram.PNG|thumb|none|Sensor Setup in a typical thermogravimetric analyzer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Data Output &amp;amp; Analysis ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Typical Curve.PNG|thumb|Typical TGA curve &amp;lt;ref Name=&amp;quot;TGAguide&amp;quot;&amp;gt; A Beginner’s Guide to Thermogravimetric Analysis. FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS Thermogravimetric Analysis (TGA). (n.d.). https://resources.perkinelmer.com/lab-solutions/resources/docs/FAQ_Beginners-Guide-to-Thermogravimetric-Analysis_009380C_01.pdf. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
TGA gives a mass vs. temperature plot. The derivative of mass vs. temperature is known as “DTG”, and can also be plotted against temperature. The degradation temperature of samples can be found from the largest value of DTG (point of fastest degradation). The 5%, 50%, and 99% mass lost temperatures (where applicable) can be determined from the initial mass. The primary component of initial weight loss is usually evaporation of moisture and other volatiles. At larger values of weight loss weight loss the primary factors are typically pyrolysis, reduction, and desorption. Multistage decomposition is also common, and shows as a step-like pattern. In some cases, these steps may blend together during dynamic (continuous heating) TGA, necessitating either far slower heating rates, or step-wise methods like quasistatic (heating at intervals) TGA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While both inert (&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; N_2 &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; or noble gas) and oxidizing (&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; O_2 &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;) atmospheres can be used for TGA, the inert atmosphere is often preferred because it doesn’t interact with the sample and influence the collected data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Applications ==&lt;br /&gt;
Note that TGA itself may not be sufficient to identify the decomposition products; chemical testing of the sample after TGA analysis is often required to ascertain the identities of suspected decomposition products. TGA itself does not identify substances; other methods such as chemical testing or differential calorimetry must performed alongside TGA to verify the identity of products. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TGA is vital when designing materials that are intended to withstand high temperatures, as if there is even slight decomposition of the material at a temperature that the material would be expected to encounter, devices made of the material may fail over repeated use. The carefully controlled environment of the TGA analyzer also allows for measuring decomposition reaction kinetics. Differential scanning calorimetry can be incorporated into the TGA analyzer to allow for monitoring potential phase changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References == &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Equipment|meas]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Thermogravimetric_Analysis&amp;diff=39191</id>
		<title>Thermogravimetric Analysis</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Thermogravimetric_Analysis&amp;diff=39191"/>
		<updated>2021-08-02T19:26:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{|class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; | TGA&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:TGA_080221.png|center|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Temperature Range:&#039;&#039;&#039; Ambient to 1000°C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Balance Capacity:&#039;&#039;&#039; 1500 mg&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Balance Precision:&#039;&#039;&#039; 0.001%&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thermogravimetric analysis (TGA) uses heat to force reactions and physical changes in materials&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;TGAoverview&amp;quot;&amp;gt; Intertek. (n.d.). Thermogravimetric Analysis (TGA) ASTM E1131, ISO 11358. https://www.intertek.com/polymers/testlopedia/tga-astm-e1131/. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;, and provides quantitative measurements of mass change associated with transition and thermal degradation. TGA records changes in a sample&#039;s mass from the dehydration, decomposition, and oxidation of a sample against changes in time and temperature. The characteristic thermogravimetric curves of materials and chemical compounds are given by unique sequences of physicochemical reactions, which occur at specific temperature ranges and heating rates depending on the sample&#039;s molecular structure.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TGA Diagram.PNG|thumb|none|Sensor Setup in a typical thermogravimetric analyzer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Principle ==&lt;br /&gt;
For classic thermogravimetry, a sample is usually put into a crucible out of inert material (e.g. platinum, alumina, gold…) and placed on a sensor within a furnace that can apply controlled atmospheres and temperatures&amp;lt;ref Name=&amp;quot;Linseis&amp;quot;&amp;gt; Thermogravimetric analysis - analytical method of [mg]. Linseis Messgeräte GmbH. (2020, November 26). https://www.linseis.com/en/methods/thermogravimetric-analysis/. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;. The sensor is connected to a high-resolution microbalance that records the mass change during the experiment. In most thermogravimetric analyzers, compensation balances are used for this purpose. A compensation balance is a special version of a balance where an electric magnet compensates the applied mass-lab balances often work according to the same principle. While the sample sees a change in heat, the balance is usually kept in a static temperature environment in a separate chamber or at a certain distance from the sensor. The exact temperature of the sample is monitored by thermocouples that use the Seebeck-effect for precise temperature determination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Data Output &amp;amp; Analysis ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Typical Curve.PNG|thumb|Typical TGA curve &amp;lt;ref Name=&amp;quot;TGAguide&amp;quot;&amp;gt; A Beginner’s Guide to Thermogravimetric Analysis. FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS Thermogravimetric Analysis (TGA). (n.d.). https://resources.perkinelmer.com/lab-solutions/resources/docs/FAQ_Beginners-Guide-to-Thermogravimetric-Analysis_009380C_01.pdf. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
TGA gives a mass vs. temperature plot. The derivative of mass vs. temperature is known as “DTG”, and can also be plotted against temperature. The degradation temperature of samples can be found from the largest value of DTG (point of fastest degradation). The 5%, 50%, and 99% mass lost temperatures (where applicable) can be determined from the initial mass. The primary component of initial weight loss is usually evaporation of moisture and other volatiles. At larger values of weight loss weight loss the primary factors are typically pyrolysis, reduction, and desorption. Multistage decomposition is also common, and shows as a step-like pattern. In some cases, these steps may blend together during dynamic (continuous heating) TGA, necessitating either far slower heating rates, or step-wise methods like quasistatic (heating at intervals) TGA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While both inert (&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; N_2 &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; or noble gas) and oxidizing (&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; O_2 &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;) atmospheres can be used for TGA, the inert atmosphere is often preferred because it doesn’t interact with the sample and influence the collected data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Applications ==&lt;br /&gt;
Note that TGA itself may not be sufficient to identify the decomposition products; chemical testing of the sample after TGA analysis is often required to ascertain the identities of suspected decomposition products. TGA itself does not identify substances; other methods such as chemical testing or differential calorimetry must performed alongside TGA to verify the identity of products. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TGA is vital when designing materials that are intended to withstand high temperatures, as if there is even slight decomposition of the material at a temperature that the material would be expected to encounter, devices made of the material may fail over repeated use. The carefully controlled environment of the TGA analyzer also allows for measuring decomposition reaction kinetics. Differential scanning calorimetry can be incorporated into the TGA analyzer to allow for monitoring potential phase changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References == &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Equipment|meas]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Thermogravimetric_Analysis&amp;diff=39190</id>
		<title>Thermogravimetric Analysis</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Thermogravimetric_Analysis&amp;diff=39190"/>
		<updated>2021-08-02T19:26:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{|class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; | TGA&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:TGA_080221.png|center|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Temperature Range:&#039;&#039;&#039; Ambient to 1000°C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Balance Capacity:&#039;&#039;&#039; 1500 mg&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Balance Precision:&#039;&#039;&#039; 0.001%&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thermogravimetric analysis (TGA) uses heat to force reactions and physical changes in materials&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;TGAoverview&amp;quot;&amp;gt; Intertek. (n.d.). Thermogravimetric Analysis (TGA) ASTM E1131, ISO 11358. https://www.intertek.com/polymers/testlopedia/tga-astm-e1131/. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;, and provides quantitative measurements of mass change associated with transition and thermal degradation. TGA records changes in a sample&#039;s mass from the dehydration, decomposition, and oxidation of a sample against changes in time and temperature. The characteristic thermogravimetric curves of materials and chemical compounds are given by unique sequences of physicochemical reactions, which occur at specific temperature ranges and heating rates depending on the sample&#039;s molecular structure.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TGA Diagram.PNG|thumb|right|Sensor Setup in a typical thermogravimetric analyzer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Principle ==&lt;br /&gt;
For classic thermogravimetry, a sample is usually put into a crucible out of inert material (e.g. platinum, alumina, gold…) and placed on a sensor within a furnace that can apply controlled atmospheres and temperatures&amp;lt;ref Name=&amp;quot;Linseis&amp;quot;&amp;gt; Thermogravimetric analysis - analytical method of [mg]. Linseis Messgeräte GmbH. (2020, November 26). https://www.linseis.com/en/methods/thermogravimetric-analysis/. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;. The sensor is connected to a high-resolution microbalance that records the mass change during the experiment. In most thermogravimetric analyzers, compensation balances are used for this purpose. A compensation balance is a special version of a balance where an electric magnet compensates the applied mass-lab balances often work according to the same principle. While the sample sees a change in heat, the balance is usually kept in a static temperature environment in a separate chamber or at a certain distance from the sensor. The exact temperature of the sample is monitored by thermocouples that use the Seebeck-effect for precise temperature determination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Data Output &amp;amp; Analysis ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Typical Curve.PNG|thumb|Typical TGA curve &amp;lt;ref Name=&amp;quot;TGAguide&amp;quot;&amp;gt; A Beginner’s Guide to Thermogravimetric Analysis. FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS Thermogravimetric Analysis (TGA). (n.d.). https://resources.perkinelmer.com/lab-solutions/resources/docs/FAQ_Beginners-Guide-to-Thermogravimetric-Analysis_009380C_01.pdf. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
TGA gives a mass vs. temperature plot. The derivative of mass vs. temperature is known as “DTG”, and can also be plotted against temperature. The degradation temperature of samples can be found from the largest value of DTG (point of fastest degradation). The 5%, 50%, and 99% mass lost temperatures (where applicable) can be determined from the initial mass. The primary component of initial weight loss is usually evaporation of moisture and other volatiles. At larger values of weight loss weight loss the primary factors are typically pyrolysis, reduction, and desorption. Multistage decomposition is also common, and shows as a step-like pattern. In some cases, these steps may blend together during dynamic (continuous heating) TGA, necessitating either far slower heating rates, or step-wise methods like quasistatic (heating at intervals) TGA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While both inert (&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; N_2 &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; or noble gas) and oxidizing (&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; O_2 &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;) atmospheres can be used for TGA, the inert atmosphere is often preferred because it doesn’t interact with the sample and influence the collected data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Applications ==&lt;br /&gt;
Note that TGA itself may not be sufficient to identify the decomposition products; chemical testing of the sample after TGA analysis is often required to ascertain the identities of suspected decomposition products. TGA itself does not identify substances; other methods such as chemical testing or differential calorimetry must performed alongside TGA to verify the identity of products. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TGA is vital when designing materials that are intended to withstand high temperatures, as if there is even slight decomposition of the material at a temperature that the material would be expected to encounter, devices made of the material may fail over repeated use. The carefully controlled environment of the TGA analyzer also allows for measuring decomposition reaction kinetics. Differential scanning calorimetry can be incorporated into the TGA analyzer to allow for monitoring potential phase changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References == &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Equipment|meas]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Thermogravimetric_Analysis&amp;diff=39189</id>
		<title>Thermogravimetric Analysis</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Thermogravimetric_Analysis&amp;diff=39189"/>
		<updated>2021-08-02T19:25:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{|class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; | TGA&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:TGA_080221.png|center|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Temperature Range:&#039;&#039;&#039; Ambient to 1000°C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Balance Capacity:&#039;&#039;&#039; 1500 mg&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Balance Precision:&#039;&#039;&#039; 0.001%&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thermogravimetric analysis (TGA) uses heat to force reactions and physical changes in materials&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;TGAoverview&amp;quot;&amp;gt; Intertek. (n.d.). Thermogravimetric Analysis (TGA) ASTM E1131, ISO 11358. https://www.intertek.com/polymers/testlopedia/tga-astm-e1131/. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;, and provides quantitative measurements of mass change associated with transition and thermal degradation. TGA records changes in a sample&#039;s mass from the dehydration, decomposition, and oxidation of a sample against changes in time and temperature. The characteristic thermogravimetric curves of materials and chemical compounds are given by unique sequences of physicochemical reactions, which occur at specific temperature ranges and heating rates depending on the sample&#039;s molecular structure.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TGA Diagram.PNG|thumb|left|Sensor Setup in a typical thermogravimetric analyzer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Principle ==&lt;br /&gt;
For classic thermogravimetry, a sample is usually put into a crucible out of inert material (e.g. platinum, alumina, gold…) and placed on a sensor within a furnace that can apply controlled atmospheres and temperatures&amp;lt;ref Name=&amp;quot;Linseis&amp;quot;&amp;gt; Thermogravimetric analysis - analytical method of [mg]. Linseis Messgeräte GmbH. (2020, November 26). https://www.linseis.com/en/methods/thermogravimetric-analysis/. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;. The sensor is connected to a high-resolution microbalance that records the mass change during the experiment. In most thermogravimetric analyzers, compensation balances are used for this purpose. A compensation balance is a special version of a balance where an electric magnet compensates the applied mass-lab balances often work according to the same principle. While the sample sees a change in heat, the balance is usually kept in a static temperature environment in a separate chamber or at a certain distance from the sensor. The exact temperature of the sample is monitored by thermocouples that use the Seebeck-effect for precise temperature determination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Data Output &amp;amp; Analysis ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Typical Curve.PNG|thumb|Typical TGA curve &amp;lt;ref Name=&amp;quot;TGAguide&amp;quot;&amp;gt; A Beginner’s Guide to Thermogravimetric Analysis. FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS Thermogravimetric Analysis (TGA). (n.d.). https://resources.perkinelmer.com/lab-solutions/resources/docs/FAQ_Beginners-Guide-to-Thermogravimetric-Analysis_009380C_01.pdf. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
TGA gives a mass vs. temperature plot. The derivative of mass vs. temperature is known as “DTG”, and can also be plotted against temperature. The degradation temperature of samples can be found from the largest value of DTG (point of fastest degradation). The 5%, 50%, and 99% mass lost temperatures (where applicable) can be determined from the initial mass. The primary component of initial weight loss is usually evaporation of moisture and other volatiles. At larger values of weight loss weight loss the primary factors are typically pyrolysis, reduction, and desorption. Multistage decomposition is also common, and shows as a step-like pattern. In some cases, these steps may blend together during dynamic (continuous heating) TGA, necessitating either far slower heating rates, or step-wise methods like quasistatic (heating at intervals) TGA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While both inert (&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; N_2 &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; or noble gas) and oxidizing (&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; O_2 &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;) atmospheres can be used for TGA, the inert atmosphere is often preferred because it doesn’t interact with the sample and influence the collected data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Applications ==&lt;br /&gt;
Note that TGA itself may not be sufficient to identify the decomposition products; chemical testing of the sample after TGA analysis is often required to ascertain the identities of suspected decomposition products. TGA itself does not identify substances; other methods such as chemical testing or differential calorimetry must performed alongside TGA to verify the identity of products. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TGA is vital when designing materials that are intended to withstand high temperatures, as if there is even slight decomposition of the material at a temperature that the material would be expected to encounter, devices made of the material may fail over repeated use. The carefully controlled environment of the TGA analyzer also allows for measuring decomposition reaction kinetics. Differential scanning calorimetry can be incorporated into the TGA analyzer to allow for monitoring potential phase changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References == &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Equipment|meas]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Thermogravimetric_Analysis&amp;diff=39188</id>
		<title>Thermogravimetric Analysis</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Thermogravimetric_Analysis&amp;diff=39188"/>
		<updated>2021-08-02T19:15:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{|class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; | TGA&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:TGA_080221.png|center|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Temperature Range:&#039;&#039;&#039; Ambient to 1000°C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Balance Capacity:&#039;&#039;&#039; 1500 mg&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Balance Precision:&#039;&#039;&#039; 0.001%&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thermogravimetric analysis (TGA) uses heat to force reactions and physical changes in materials&amp;lt;ref Name=&amp;quot;TGAoverview&amp;quot;&amp;gt; Intertek. (n.d.). Thermogravimetric Analysis (TGA) ASTM E1131, ISO 11358. https://www.intertek.com/polymers/testlopedia/tga-astm-e1131/. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;. TGA provides quantitative measurement of mass change in materials associated with transition and thermal degradation. TGA records change in mass from dehydration, decomposition, and oxidation of a sample with time and temperature. Characteristic thermogravimetric curves are given for specific materials and chemical compounds due to unique sequence from physicochemical reactions occurring over specific temperature ranges and heating rates. These unique characteristics are related to the molecular structure of the sample.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TGA Diagram.PNG|thumb|left|Sensor Setup in a typical thermogravimetric analyzer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Principle ==&lt;br /&gt;
For classic thermogravimetry, a sample is usually put into a crucible out of inert material (e.g. platinum, alumina, gold…) and placed on a sensor within a furnace that can apply controlled atmospheres and temperatures&amp;lt;ref Name=&amp;quot;Linseis&amp;quot;&amp;gt; Thermogravimetric analysis - analytical method of [mg]. Linseis Messgeräte GmbH. (2020, November 26). https://www.linseis.com/en/methods/thermogravimetric-analysis/. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;. The sensor is connected to a high-resolution microbalance that records the mass change during the experiment. In most thermogravimetric analyzers, compensation balances are used for this purpose. A compensation balance is a special version of a balance where an electric magnet compensates the applied mass-lab balances often work according to the same principle. While the sample sees a change in heat, the balance is usually kept in a static temperature environment in a separate chamber or at a certain distance from the sensor. The exact temperature of the sample is monitored by thermocouples that use the Seebeck-effect for precise temperature determination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Data Output &amp;amp; Analysis ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Typical Curve.PNG|thumb|Typical TGA curve &amp;lt;ref Name=&amp;quot;TGAguide&amp;quot;&amp;gt; A Beginner’s Guide to Thermogravimetric Analysis. FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS Thermogravimetric Analysis (TGA). (n.d.). https://resources.perkinelmer.com/lab-solutions/resources/docs/FAQ_Beginners-Guide-to-Thermogravimetric-Analysis_009380C_01.pdf. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
TGA gives a mass vs. temperature plot. The derivative of mass vs. temperature is known as “DTG”, and can also be plotted against temperature. The degradation temperature of samples can be found from the largest value of DTG (point of fastest degradation). The 5%, 50%, and 99% mass lost temperatures (where applicable) can be determined from the initial mass. The primary component of initial weight loss is usually evaporation of moisture and other volatiles. At larger values of weight loss weight loss the primary factors are typically pyrolysis, reduction, and desorption. Multistage decomposition is also common, and shows as a step-like pattern. In some cases, these steps may blend together during dynamic (continuous heating) TGA, necessitating either far slower heating rates, or step-wise methods like quasistatic (heating at intervals) TGA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While both inert (&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; N_2 &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; or noble gas) and oxidizing (&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; O_2 &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;) atmospheres can be used for TGA, the inert atmosphere is often preferred because it doesn’t interact with the sample and influence the collected data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Applications ==&lt;br /&gt;
Note that TGA itself may not be sufficient to identify the decomposition products; chemical testing of the sample after TGA analysis is often required to ascertain the identities of suspected decomposition products. TGA itself does not identify substances; other methods such as chemical testing or differential calorimetry must performed alongside TGA to verify the identity of products. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TGA is vital when designing materials that are intended to withstand high temperatures, as if there is even slight decomposition of the material at a temperature that the material would be expected to encounter, devices made of the material may fail over repeated use. The carefully controlled environment of the TGA analyzer also allows for measuring decomposition reaction kinetics. Differential scanning calorimetry can be incorporated into the TGA analyzer to allow for monitoring potential phase changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References == &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Equipment|meas]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=File:TGA_080221.png&amp;diff=39187</id>
		<title>File:TGA 080221.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=File:TGA_080221.png&amp;diff=39187"/>
		<updated>2021-08-02T19:15:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: PerkinElmer TGA 4000&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Summary ==&lt;br /&gt;
PerkinElmer TGA 4000&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Thermogravimetric_Analysis&amp;diff=39186</id>
		<title>Thermogravimetric Analysis</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Thermogravimetric_Analysis&amp;diff=39186"/>
		<updated>2021-08-02T19:03:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{|class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; | TGA&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:TGA4000.jpg|center|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Temperature Range:&#039;&#039;&#039; Ambient to 1000°C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Balance Capacity:&#039;&#039;&#039; 1500 mg&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Balance Precision:&#039;&#039;&#039; 0.001%&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thermogravimetric analysis (TGA) uses heat to force reactions and physical changes in materials&amp;lt;ref Name=&amp;quot;TGAoverview&amp;quot;&amp;gt; Intertek. (n.d.). Thermogravimetric Analysis (TGA) ASTM E1131, ISO 11358. https://www.intertek.com/polymers/testlopedia/tga-astm-e1131/. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;. TGA provides quantitative measurement of mass change in materials associated with transition and thermal degradation. TGA records change in mass from dehydration, decomposition, and oxidation of a sample with time and temperature. Characteristic thermogravimetric curves are given for specific materials and chemical compounds due to unique sequence from physicochemical reactions occurring over specific temperature ranges and heating rates. These unique characteristics are related to the molecular structure of the sample.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TGA Diagram.PNG|thumb|left|Sensor Setup in a typical thermogravimetric analyzer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Principle ==&lt;br /&gt;
For classic thermogravimetry, a sample is usually put into a crucible out of inert material (e.g. platinum, alumina, gold…) and placed on a sensor within a furnace that can apply controlled atmospheres and temperatures&amp;lt;ref Name=&amp;quot;Linseis&amp;quot;&amp;gt; Thermogravimetric analysis - analytical method of [mg]. Linseis Messgeräte GmbH. (2020, November 26). https://www.linseis.com/en/methods/thermogravimetric-analysis/. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;. The sensor is connected to a high-resolution microbalance that records the mass change during the experiment. In most thermogravimetric analyzers, compensation balances are used for this purpose. A compensation balance is a special version of a balance where an electric magnet compensates the applied mass-lab balances often work according to the same principle. While the sample sees a change in heat, the balance is usually kept in a static temperature environment in a separate chamber or at a certain distance from the sensor. The exact temperature of the sample is monitored by thermocouples that use the Seebeck-effect for precise temperature determination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Data Output &amp;amp; Analysis ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Typical Curve.PNG|thumb|Typical TGA curve &amp;lt;ref Name=&amp;quot;TGAguide&amp;quot;&amp;gt; A Beginner’s Guide to Thermogravimetric Analysis. FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS Thermogravimetric Analysis (TGA). (n.d.). https://resources.perkinelmer.com/lab-solutions/resources/docs/FAQ_Beginners-Guide-to-Thermogravimetric-Analysis_009380C_01.pdf. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
TGA gives a mass vs. temperature plot. The derivative of mass vs. temperature is known as “DTG”, and can also be plotted against temperature. The degradation temperature of samples can be found from the largest value of DTG (point of fastest degradation). The 5%, 50%, and 99% mass lost temperatures (where applicable) can be determined from the initial mass. The primary component of initial weight loss is usually evaporation of moisture and other volatiles. At larger values of weight loss weight loss the primary factors are typically pyrolysis, reduction, and desorption. Multistage decomposition is also common, and shows as a step-like pattern. In some cases, these steps may blend together during dynamic (continuous heating) TGA, necessitating either far slower heating rates, or step-wise methods like quasistatic (heating at intervals) TGA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While both inert (&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; N_2 &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; or noble gas) and oxidizing (&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; O_2 &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;) atmospheres can be used for TGA, the inert atmosphere is often preferred because it doesn’t interact with the sample and influence the collected data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Applications ==&lt;br /&gt;
Note that TGA itself may not be sufficient to identify the decomposition products; chemical testing of the sample after TGA analysis is often required to ascertain the identities of suspected decomposition products. TGA itself does not identify substances; other methods such as chemical testing or differential calorimetry must performed alongside TGA to verify the identity of products. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TGA is vital when designing materials that are intended to withstand high temperatures, as if there is even slight decomposition of the material at a temperature that the material would be expected to encounter, devices made of the material may fail over repeated use. The carefully controlled environment of the TGA analyzer also allows for measuring decomposition reaction kinetics. Differential scanning calorimetry can be incorporated into the TGA analyzer to allow for monitoring potential phase changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References == &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Equipment|meas]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Thermogravimetric_Analysis&amp;diff=39185</id>
		<title>Thermogravimetric Analysis</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Thermogravimetric_Analysis&amp;diff=39185"/>
		<updated>2021-08-02T19:02:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{|class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; | TGA&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:TGA4000.jpg|center|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Temperature Range:&#039;&#039;&#039; Ambient to 1000°C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Balance Precision:&#039;&#039;&#039; 0.001%&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Balance Capacity:&#039;&#039;&#039; 1500 mg&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thermogravimetric analysis (TGA) uses heat to force reactions and physical changes in materials&amp;lt;ref Name=&amp;quot;TGAoverview&amp;quot;&amp;gt; Intertek. (n.d.). Thermogravimetric Analysis (TGA) ASTM E1131, ISO 11358. https://www.intertek.com/polymers/testlopedia/tga-astm-e1131/. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;. TGA provides quantitative measurement of mass change in materials associated with transition and thermal degradation. TGA records change in mass from dehydration, decomposition, and oxidation of a sample with time and temperature. Characteristic thermogravimetric curves are given for specific materials and chemical compounds due to unique sequence from physicochemical reactions occurring over specific temperature ranges and heating rates. These unique characteristics are related to the molecular structure of the sample.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TGA Diagram.PNG|thumb|left|Sensor Setup in a typical thermogravimetric analyzer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Principle ==&lt;br /&gt;
For classic thermogravimetry, a sample is usually put into a crucible out of inert material (e.g. platinum, alumina, gold…) and placed on a sensor within a furnace that can apply controlled atmospheres and temperatures&amp;lt;ref Name=&amp;quot;Linseis&amp;quot;&amp;gt; Thermogravimetric analysis - analytical method of [mg]. Linseis Messgeräte GmbH. (2020, November 26). https://www.linseis.com/en/methods/thermogravimetric-analysis/. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;. The sensor is connected to a high-resolution microbalance that records the mass change during the experiment. In most thermogravimetric analyzers, compensation balances are used for this purpose. A compensation balance is a special version of a balance where an electric magnet compensates the applied mass-lab balances often work according to the same principle. While the sample sees a change in heat, the balance is usually kept in a static temperature environment in a separate chamber or at a certain distance from the sensor. The exact temperature of the sample is monitored by thermocouples that use the Seebeck-effect for precise temperature determination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Data Output &amp;amp; Analysis ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Typical Curve.PNG|thumb|Typical TGA curve &amp;lt;ref Name=&amp;quot;TGAguide&amp;quot;&amp;gt; A Beginner’s Guide to Thermogravimetric Analysis. FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS Thermogravimetric Analysis (TGA). (n.d.). https://resources.perkinelmer.com/lab-solutions/resources/docs/FAQ_Beginners-Guide-to-Thermogravimetric-Analysis_009380C_01.pdf. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
TGA gives a mass vs. temperature plot. The derivative of mass vs. temperature is known as “DTG”, and can also be plotted against temperature. The degradation temperature of samples can be found from the largest value of DTG (point of fastest degradation). The 5%, 50%, and 99% mass lost temperatures (where applicable) can be determined from the initial mass. The primary component of initial weight loss is usually evaporation of moisture and other volatiles. At larger values of weight loss weight loss the primary factors are typically pyrolysis, reduction, and desorption. Multistage decomposition is also common, and shows as a step-like pattern. In some cases, these steps may blend together during dynamic (continuous heating) TGA, necessitating either far slower heating rates, or step-wise methods like quasistatic (heating at intervals) TGA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While both inert (&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; N_2 &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; or noble gas) and oxidizing (&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; O_2 &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;) atmospheres can be used for TGA, the inert atmosphere is often preferred because it doesn’t interact with the sample and influence the collected data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Applications ==&lt;br /&gt;
Note that TGA itself may not be sufficient to identify the decomposition products; chemical testing of the sample after TGA analysis is often required to ascertain the identities of suspected decomposition products. TGA itself does not identify substances; other methods such as chemical testing or differential calorimetry must performed alongside TGA to verify the identity of products. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TGA is vital when designing materials that are intended to withstand high temperatures, as if there is even slight decomposition of the material at a temperature that the material would be expected to encounter, devices made of the material may fail over repeated use. The carefully controlled environment of the TGA analyzer also allows for measuring decomposition reaction kinetics. Differential scanning calorimetry can be incorporated into the TGA analyzer to allow for monitoring potential phase changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References == &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Equipment|meas]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Thermogravimetric_Analysis&amp;diff=39184</id>
		<title>Thermogravimetric Analysis</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://millwiki.mse.gatech.edu/index.php?title=Thermogravimetric_Analysis&amp;diff=39184"/>
		<updated>2021-08-02T19:02:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rzhou95: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{|class=&amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!style=&amp;quot;font-size:135%;text-align:center;&amp;quot; | TGA&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:TGA4000.jpg|center|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Temperature Range:&#039;&#039;&#039; Ambient to 1000 °C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Balance Precision:&#039;&#039;&#039; 0.001%&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Balance Capacity:&#039;&#039;&#039; 1500 mg&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thermogravimetric analysis (TGA) uses heat to force reactions and physical changes in materials&amp;lt;ref Name=&amp;quot;TGAoverview&amp;quot;&amp;gt; Intertek. (n.d.). Thermogravimetric Analysis (TGA) ASTM E1131, ISO 11358. https://www.intertek.com/polymers/testlopedia/tga-astm-e1131/. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;. TGA provides quantitative measurement of mass change in materials associated with transition and thermal degradation. TGA records change in mass from dehydration, decomposition, and oxidation of a sample with time and temperature. Characteristic thermogravimetric curves are given for specific materials and chemical compounds due to unique sequence from physicochemical reactions occurring over specific temperature ranges and heating rates. These unique characteristics are related to the molecular structure of the sample.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TGA Diagram.PNG|thumb|left|Sensor Setup in a typical thermogravimetric analyzer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Principle ==&lt;br /&gt;
For classic thermogravimetry, a sample is usually put into a crucible out of inert material (e.g. platinum, alumina, gold…) and placed on a sensor within a furnace that can apply controlled atmospheres and temperatures&amp;lt;ref Name=&amp;quot;Linseis&amp;quot;&amp;gt; Thermogravimetric analysis - analytical method of [mg]. Linseis Messgeräte GmbH. (2020, November 26). https://www.linseis.com/en/methods/thermogravimetric-analysis/. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;. The sensor is connected to a high-resolution microbalance that records the mass change during the experiment. In most thermogravimetric analyzers, compensation balances are used for this purpose. A compensation balance is a special version of a balance where an electric magnet compensates the applied mass-lab balances often work according to the same principle. While the sample sees a change in heat, the balance is usually kept in a static temperature environment in a separate chamber or at a certain distance from the sensor. The exact temperature of the sample is monitored by thermocouples that use the Seebeck-effect for precise temperature determination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Data Output &amp;amp; Analysis ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Typical Curve.PNG|thumb|Typical TGA curve &amp;lt;ref Name=&amp;quot;TGAguide&amp;quot;&amp;gt; A Beginner’s Guide to Thermogravimetric Analysis. FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS Thermogravimetric Analysis (TGA). (n.d.). https://resources.perkinelmer.com/lab-solutions/resources/docs/FAQ_Beginners-Guide-to-Thermogravimetric-Analysis_009380C_01.pdf. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
TGA gives a mass vs. temperature plot. The derivative of mass vs. temperature is known as “DTG”, and can also be plotted against temperature. The degradation temperature of samples can be found from the largest value of DTG (point of fastest degradation). The 5%, 50%, and 99% mass lost temperatures (where applicable) can be determined from the initial mass. The primary component of initial weight loss is usually evaporation of moisture and other volatiles. At larger values of weight loss weight loss the primary factors are typically pyrolysis, reduction, and desorption. Multistage decomposition is also common, and shows as a step-like pattern. In some cases, these steps may blend together during dynamic (continuous heating) TGA, necessitating either far slower heating rates, or step-wise methods like quasistatic (heating at intervals) TGA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While both inert (&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; N_2 &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; or noble gas) and oxidizing (&amp;lt;math&amp;gt; O_2 &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;) atmospheres can be used for TGA, the inert atmosphere is often preferred because it doesn’t interact with the sample and influence the collected data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Applications ==&lt;br /&gt;
Note that TGA itself may not be sufficient to identify the decomposition products; chemical testing of the sample after TGA analysis is often required to ascertain the identities of suspected decomposition products. TGA itself does not identify substances; other methods such as chemical testing or differential calorimetry must performed alongside TGA to verify the identity of products. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TGA is vital when designing materials that are intended to withstand high temperatures, as if there is even slight decomposition of the material at a temperature that the material would be expected to encounter, devices made of the material may fail over repeated use. The carefully controlled environment of the TGA analyzer also allows for measuring decomposition reaction kinetics. Differential scanning calorimetry can be incorporated into the TGA analyzer to allow for monitoring potential phase changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References == &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Equipment|meas]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rzhou95</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>